LG 37LD320H Owner's Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL
LCD TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.
26LD320H
32LD320H
37LD320H
42LD320H
32LD325H
37LD325H
32LD310H
37LD310H
The model and serial number of the TV is located
on the back and one side of the TV.
Record it below should you ever need service.
MODEL
SERIAL
P/NO : SAC34026009 (1103-REV02)
www.lg.com
WARNING
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazards, do not expose
this product to rain or moisture.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
NOTE TO CABLE/TV INSTALLER
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the National
Electric Code (U.S.A.). The code provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the
grounding system of the building, as close to the
point of the cable entry as practical.
2
FCC Notice
Class B digital device
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause (harmful)
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation (of the
device).
Any changes or modifications in construction of
this device which are not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to modify this product in any
way without written authorization from LG
Electronics.
Unauthorized modification could void the user’s
authority to operate this product.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
10
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
1
Do not use this apparatus
near water.
2
Clean only with dry cloth.
3
Do not block any ventilation
openings. Install in accordance
with
the
manufacturer’s
instructions.
4
Do not install near any heat
sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
5
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug
has two blades with one wider
than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a
third grounding prong, The wide
blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the
obsolete outlet. (Can differ by
country)
6
Protect the power cord from
being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the
apparatus.
7
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
8
Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus. When
a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury
from tip-over.
9
Unplug this apparatus during
lighting storms or when unused
for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such
as power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
11
Never touch this apparatus or antenna
during a thunder or lighting storm.
12
When mounting a TV on the wall, make sure
not to install the TV by the hanging power
and signal cables on the back of the TV.
13
Do not allow an impact shock or any objects
to fall into the product, and do not drop
onto the screen with something.
14
CAUTION concerning the Power Cord:
It is recommend that appliances be placed
upon a dedicated circuit; that is, a single
outlet circuit which powers only that appliance and has no additional outlets or
branch circuits. Check the specification
page of this owner's manual to be certain.
Do n ot connect too many appliances to the
same AC power outlet as this could result in
fire or electric shock.
Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded
wall outlets, loose or damaged wall outlets,
extension cords, frayed power cords, or
damaged or cracked wire insulation are
dangerous . Any of these conditions could
result in electric shock or fire. Periodically
examine the cord of your appliance, and if its
appearance indicates damage or deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord replaced with an
exact replacement part by an authorized
servicer. Protect the power cord from physical or mechanical abuse, such as being
twisted, kinked, pinched, closed in a door, or
walked upon. Pay particular attention to
plugs, wall outlets, and the point where the
cord exits the appliance.
Do not make the TV with the power cord
plugged in. Do not use a damaged or loose
power cord. Be sure do grasp the plug
when unplugging the power cord. Do not
pull on the power cord to unplug the TV.
3
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
15
WARNING - To reduce the risk of
fire or electrical shock, do not
expose this product to rain,
moisture or other liquids. Do not
touch the TV with wet hands. Do
not install this product near
flammable objects such as gasoline or candles or expose the
TV to direct air conditioning.
16
Do not expose to dripping or
splashing and do not place
objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, cups, etc. on or over
the apparatus (e.g. on shelves
above the unit).
17
GROUNDING
Ensure that you connect the earth ground wire
to prevent possible electric shock (i.e. a TV with
a three-prong grounded AC plug must be connected to a three-prong grounded AC outlet). If
grounding methods are not possible, have a
qualified electrician install a separate circuit
breaker.
Do not try to ground the unit by connecting it to
telephone wires, lightening rods, or gas pipes.
22
Ground Clamp
DISCONNECTING DEVICE FROM MAINS
Mains plug is the disconnecting device. The
plug must remain readily operable.
19
As long as this unit is connected to the AC
wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC
power source even if you turn off this unit by
SWITCH.
20
Cleaning
When cleaning, unplug the power cord and
scrub gently with a soft cloth to prevent
scratching. Do not spray water or other liquids
directly on the TV as electric shock may
occur. Do not clean with chemicals such as
alcohol, thinners or benzene.
21
4
Moving
Make sure the product is turned off, unplugged
and all cables have been removed. It may
take 2 or more people to carry larger TVs. Do
not press against or put stress on the front
panel of the TV.
Antenna Lead in Wire
Antenna Discharge Unit
(NEC Section 810-20)
Electric Service
Equipment
Power
Supply
Short-circuit
Breaker
18
ANTENNAS
Outdoor antenna grounding
(Can differ by country) If an outdoor antenna
is installed, follow the precautions below. An
outdoor antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power
lines or other electric light or power circuits,
or where it can come in contact with such
power lines or circuits as death or serious
injury can occur.
Be sure the antenna system is grounded so
as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electrical Code
(NEC) in the U.S.A. provides information
with respect to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding
of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge
unit, size of grounding conductors, location
of antenna discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes and requirements for
the grounding electrode.
Antenna grounding according to the
National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70
Grounding Conductor
(NEC Section 810-21)
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding
Electrode System (NEC
Art 250, Part H)
NEC: National Electrical Code
23
Ventilation
Install your TV where there is proper ventilation. Do not install in a confined space such
as a bookcase. Do not cover the product
with cloth or other materials (e.g.) plastic
while plugged in. Do not install in excessively dusty places.
24
Take care not to touch the ventilation openings. When watching the TV for a long
period, the ventilation openings may
become hot. This does not affect the performance of the product or cause defects in
the product.
25
If you smell smoke or other odors coming
from the TV, unplug the power cord contact
and authorized service center.
26
Do not press strongly upon the
panel with hand or sharp object
such as nail, pencil or pen, or
make a scratch on it.
27
Keep the product away from direct sunlight.
28
Dot Defect
The Plasma or LCD panel is a high technology product with resolution of two million to
six million pixels. In a very few cases, you
could see fine dots on the screen while you’re
viewing the TV. Those dots are deactivated
pixels and do not affect the performance and
reliability of the TV.
29
Generated Sound
“Cracking” noise: A cracking noise that occurs
when watching or turning off the TV is generated by plastic thermal contraction due to
temperature and humidity. This noise is common for products where thermal deformation
is required.
Electrical circuit humming/panel buzzing: A
low level noise is generated from a high-speed
switching circuit, which supplies a large amount
of current to operate a product. It varies
depending on the product.
This generated sound does not affect the
performance and reliability of the product.
30
For LED LCD TV/ LCD TV
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be
a small “flicker” when it is turned on. This is
normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
Some minute dot defects may be visible on
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or
blue spots. However, they have no adverse
effect on the monitor’s performance.
Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen.
ON DISPOSAL
(Only Hg lamp used LCD TV)
The fluorescent lamp used in this product
contains a small amount of mercury. Do not
dispose of this product with general household waste. Disposal of this product must be
carried out in accordance to the regulations of
your local authority.
5
CONTENTS
WARNING...........................................................2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS......................... 3
FEATURE OF THIS TV...............................8
PREPARATION
Accessories..............................................................9
Front Panel Information.....................................10
Back Panel Information....................................... 11
Stand Instructions................................................ 13
VESA wall mounting...........................................15
Cable Management............................................16
Desktop Pedestal Installation........................... 17
Swivel Stand .......................................................... 17
Kensington Security System............................ 17
Attaching the TV to a Desk..............................18
Securing the TV to the Wall to Prevent Falling
when the TV is used on a stand....................20
Antenna or Cable Connection......................... 21
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
HD Receiver setup..............................................22
DVD setup.............................................................25
VCR SETUP.......................................................... 27
Other A/V Source Setup..................................28
USB Connection.................................................29
PC Setup...............................................................30
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Remote Control Functions...............................38
Turning on the TV...............................................40
Channel Selection..............................................40
Volume Adjustment...........................................40
On-Screen Menus Selection............................ 41
Customer Support
- Picture Test / Sound Test..............................43
- Product/Service Info.......................................44
6
Channel Setup
- Auto Scan (Auto Tuning)...............................45
- Add/Delete Channel (Manual Tuning)......46
- Channel Editing................................................ 47
Input List...............................................................48
Example Electronic Program Guide..............49
Channel Label......................................................50
Demo Mode..........................................................51
MY MEDIA
Connection Method...........................................52
Entry Mode...........................................................54
Photo List..............................................................55
Music List............................................................... 61
Extra Contents.....................................................65
PICTURE CONTROL
Picture Size (Aspect Ratio) Control...............66
Preset Picture Settings (Picture mode).......68
Manual Picture Adjustment - User Mode... 69
Picture Improvement Technology (Advanced
Control).................................................................. 70
Picture Reset........................................................ 73
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Auto Volume......................................................... 74
Clear Voice II........................................................ 75
Balance.................................................................. 76
Preset Sound Settings (Sound Mode)......... 77
Sound Setting Adjustment - User Mode.... 78
Audio Reset.......................................................... 79
TV Speakers On/Off.......................................... 79
Setup Audio Language .................................. 80
On-screen Menus Language Selection........ 81
Caption Mode
- Analog Broadcasting System Captions....82
- Digital Broadcasting System Captions......83
- Caption Option.................................................84
TIME SETTING
Clock Setting
- Auto Clock Setup............................................85
- Manual Clock Setup.......................................86
Auto On/Off Time Setting............................... 87
Sleep Timer Setting...........................................88
Auto Shut-Off Setting.......................................88
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password & Lock System
- Setting up Your Password.............................89
- Set Password....................................................90
- Lock System....................................................... 91
Channel Blocking................................................92
Movie & TV Rating.............................................93
Downloadable Rating.........................................96
External Input Blocking..................................... 97
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting...................................................98
Maintenance.......................................................100
Product Specifications..................................... 101
IR Code................................................................ 102
Open Source License...................................... 103
7
FEATURE OF THIS TV
ꔛ
Some of these features are not available on all models.
High-definition
television.
Highresolution digital television broadcast
and playback system composed of
roughly a million or more pixels, 16:9
aspect-ratio screens, and AC3 digital
audio. A subset of digital television,
HDTV formats include 1080i and 720p
resolutions.
A unique invisible speaker system
tuned by renowned audio expert, Mr.
Mark Levinson. Speakers are embedded in strategic spots behind the front
cabinet and use minute vibrations to
turn the entire front bezel into the
speaker system. The result s a clean,
polished look, and enhanced audio by
increasing the “sweet spot”, giving a
wider and richer sound field.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby “and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and HighDefinition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC."
View videos and photos and listen to
music on your TV through USB 2.0
(‘videos’ dependent on model).
Automatically enhances and amplifies
the sound of human voice frequency
range to help keep dialogue audible
when background noise swells.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO PREVENT “IMAGE
BURN / BURN-IN” ON YOUR TV SCREEN
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
8
When a fixed image (e.g. logos, screen menus, video game, and computer display) is displayed
on the TV for an extended period, it can become permanently imprinted on the screen. This
phenomenon is known as “image burn” or “burn-in.” Image burn is not covered under the manufacturer’s warranty.
In order to prevent image burn, avoid displaying a fixed image on your TV screen for a prolonged
period (2 or more hours for LCD, 1 or more
hours for Plasma).
Image burn can also occur on the letterboxed areas of your TV if you use the 4:3
aspect ratio setting for an extended period.
PREPARATION
ACCESSORIES
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
The accessories included may differ from the images below.
Owner’s Manual
1,5Vcc 1,5Vcc
1.5V 1.5V
CD Manual
PREPARATION
1.5V 1.5V
1,5Vcc 1,5Vcc
Remote Control,
Batteries (AAA)
Protection Cover
(Refer to P.14)
Screw for stand fixing
(Refer to P.18)
Protective Bracket and
1.5V 1.5V
Screw for Power Cord
(Refer to P.16)
x2
Power Cord
Torx plus Star head
screw
(Refer to P.13)
Option Extras
Not included with all models
* Wipe spots on the exterior only with the
polishing cloth.
Polishing Cloth
* Do not wipe roughly when removing
stains. Excessive pressure may cause
scratches or discoloration.
D-sub 15 pin Cable
(Except 26LD320H)
(Except 26LD320H)
x8
(M4 x 24)
Screws for stand assembly
(Refer to P.13)
x2
32/37LD310H
x2
x2
Cable Holder
x2
Power Cord Holder
(Refer to P.16)
x2
x2
Washers for stand fixing
(Refer to P.18)
x2
x2
x2
x2
When using the VGA (D-sub 15
pin cable) PC connection, the user
must use shielded signal interface
cables with ferrite cores to maintain standards compliance.
x2
26/32/37/42LD320H, 32/37LD325H
Screws for stand fixing
(Refer to P.18)
1,5Vcc 1,5Vcc
x4
x2
Nuts for stand fixing
(Refer to P.18)
Rubbers for stand
fixing
(Refer to P.18)
xx 24
(M4 x 24)
Screws for stand assembly
(Refer to P.13)
Cable Holder
Power Cord Holder
(Refer to P.16)
9
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL INFORMATION
ꔛ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PREPARATION
CH
VOL
CH
ENTER
CHANNEL
(▲,▼) Buttons
MENU
INPUT
VOL
SPEAKER
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
ENTER
VOLUME (+, -)
Buttons
ENTER Button
MENU
MENU Button
INPUT
INPUT Button
POWER Button
10
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
Image shown may differ from your TV.
AC IN
PREPARATION
USB IN
ꔛ
8
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
2
L/MONO AUDIO R
VIDEO
GAME
CONTROL
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
32/37/42LD320H,
32/37LD325H
1
6
2
PB
PR
VIDEO
4
5
11
VIDEO
2
1
REMOTE
CONTROL Y
AVPIN
B 1
PR
VIDEOAUDIO R
L/MONO
VIDEO
Y
AUDIO
CONTROL
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
L
COMPONENT IN
GAME
(RGB/DVI)
1
/DVIIN
AV IN 1
L/MONO AUDIO R
(SERVICE ONLY)
OUTIN
AUDIO
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO IN
/DVI IN
PB
L
PR
VIDEO
R
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
TV - LINK
CFG
AV IN 2
ANTENNA IN
M.P.I.
14
15
AV IN 2
R
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
7
3
AV IN 2
R
RS-232C IN
RJP
UPDATE
2
AUDIO
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
RGB IN (PC)
RESET
L
COMPONENT INRS-232C IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
12
Y
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
1
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
TV - LINK
CFG
5
IN 3
AV IN 1
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AC IN
H/P
(SERVICE ONLY)
UPDATE
USB IN
RESET
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
RS-232C IN
RJP
USB IN
10
9
13
AC IN
2
12
5
11
14
4
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET
UPDATE
RJP
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
/DVIIN
1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA IN
AV IN 1
VIDEO
L/MONO AUDIO R
GAME
CONTROL/ TV - LINK
M.P.I.
CFG
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
6
1
USB IN
26LD320H
AV IN 2
R
COMPONENT IN
3
7
9
15
13
11
PREPARATION
32/37LD310H
PREPARATION
1
6
2
4
5
11
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET
UPDATE
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVIIN
1
AV IN 1
VIDEO
ANTENNA IN
M.P.I.
14
15
L/MONO AUDIO R
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
3
7
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
HDMI/DVI IN, HDMI IN
Digital Connection. Supports HD video and Digital audio. Doesn’t
support 480i.
Accepts DVI video using an adapter or HDMI
to DVI cable (not included).
RGB IN (PC)
Analog PC Connection. Uses a D-sub 15 pin
cable (VGA cable).
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
0.32 cm (1/8 inch) headphone jack for analog
PC audio input.
SPEAKER OUT (8Ω)
Connect to external speaker input.
RS-232C IN (SERVICE ONLY)
Used by third party devices.
This port is used for service or Hotel mode.
AV (Audio/Video) IN
Analog composite connection. Supports standard definition video only (480i).
7
8
9
COMPONENT IN
Analog Connection.
Supports HD.
Uses a red, green, and blue cable for video &
red and white for audio.
USB INPUT
Used for viewing videos, photos and listening
to MP3s.
GAME CONTROL
Control port
Power Cord Socket
For operation with AC power.
Caution: Never attempt to operate the TV on
DC pwer.
10
REMOTE CONTROL OUT
IR output for controlling an auxiliary device. 12 RJP (REMOTE JACK PACK PORT)
Connect to remote jack pack control output
port.
11
13
UPDATE
Enables/disables software downloads and
debug mode.
TV - LINK CFG
Used for FTG Configuration
14
RESET
Performs a hardware reset.
ANTENNA IN
Connect over the air signals th this jack.
15
M. P. I.
Control port.
STAND INSTRUCTIONS
ꔛ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
2
Assemble the parts of the STAND BODY
with the STAND BASE of the TV.
(Except 32/37LD310H)
STAND BODY
M4X20
M4 x 24
STAND BASE
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
4
x4
Tighten the stand with the four screws
(provided as parts of the TV).
or
Tighten the two of these four
screws and the two Torx plus
star head screws (provided as
parts of the TV) to secure the TV. Tighten
the two Torx plus star head screws with a
star head driver bit (not provided as parts
of the TV).
x2
!
?
x2
! NOTE
► When assembling the desk type stand, make sure the screws are fully tightened (If not tightened
fully, the TV can tilt forward after the product installation). Do not over tighten.
?
13
PREPARATION
ꔛ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PREPARATION
DETACHMENT
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
1
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
2
Remove the screws from the TV.
AC IN
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
3
Detach the stand from TV.
AC IN
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PROTECTION COVER
After removing the stand, install the included
PROTECTION COVER over the hole for the
stand.
Press the PROTECTION COVER into the TV until
you hear it click.
When installing the wall mounting bracket, use
the PROTECTION COVER.
14
VESA WALL MOUNTING
VESA (A * B)
Model
26LD320H,
32LD320H,
32LD325H,
32LD310H
37LD320H,
42LD320H,
37LD325H,
37LD310H
!
?
!
?
B
A
Standard
Screw
Quantity
Wall Mounting Bracket
(sold separately)
PREPARATION
Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When attaching to other building materials, please contact your nearest installer.
If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury.
We recommend that you use an LG brand wall mount when mounting the TV to a wall.
LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer.
LSW100B, LSW100BG
200 * 100
M4
4
LSW200B, LSW200BG
200 * 200
M6
4
! NOTE
► Screw length needed depends on the wall
mount used. For further information, refer to
? the instructions included with the mount.
► Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are
shown in the table.
► When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed
installation manual and all parts necessary for
assembly are provided.
► Do not use screws longer than the standard
dimension, as they may cause damage to the
inside to the TV.
wall mounts that do not comply with the
!► For
VESA standard screw specifications, the length
of the screws may differ depending on their
specifications.
► Do not use screws that do not comply with the
VESA standard screw specifications.
Do not use fasten the screws too strongly, this
may damage the TV or cause the TV to a fall,
leading to personal injury. LG is not liable for
these kinds of accidents.
► LG is not liable for TV damage or personal
injury when a non-VESA or non specified wall
mount is used or the consumer fails to follow
the TV installation instructions.
?
CAUTION
► Do not install your wall mount kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to
electric shock.
15
PREPARATION
CABLE MANAGEMENT
ꔛ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PREPARATION
1
Connect the cables as necessary.
To connect additional equipment, see the EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP section.
Secure the power cord with the PROTECTIVE BRACKET/SCREW or the POWER CORD HOLDER.
It will help prevent the power cable from being removed by accident.
or
PROTECTIVE BRACKET/SCREW
2
Install the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP as shown. If your TV has the CABLE
HORDER, install it as shown and bundle the cables.
CABLE HORDER
CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP
3
16
Put the cables inside the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP and snap it closed.
POWER CORD HOLDER
DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION
ꔛ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
For proper ventilation, allow a clearance of 10.1 cm (4 inch) on all four sides from the wall.
!
!
?
?
10.1 cm (4 inch)
10.1 cm (4 inch)
10.1 cm (4 inch)
PREPARATION
10.1 cm (4 inch)
CAUTION
► Ensure adequate ventilation by following the clearance recommendations.
► Do not mount near or above any type of heat source.
SWIVEL STAND
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set manually to the left or right direction by 90 º to suit
your viewing position.
KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM
ꔛ
This feature is not available for all models.
-T
he TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel. Connect the Kensington Security
System cable as shown below.
- For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security
System, refer to the user’s guide provided with the Kensington
Security System.
For further information, contact http://www.kensington.com,
the internet homepage of the Kensington company. Kensington
sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such
as notebook PCs and LCD projectors.
NOTE: The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory.
17
PREPARATION
ATTACHING THE TV TO A DESK
ꔛ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PREPARATION
The TV must be attached to a desk so it cannot be pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially causing injury or damaging the product.
Stand
1-Screw
(provided as parts of the product)
Desk
32/37/42LD320H, 32/37LD325H
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
4-Screws
(not provided as parts
2 SCREW SET
(SCREW/of
WASHER/
NUT product)
the
INCLUDED)
(For TYPE 1)
2 SCREW SET
2-Screws,
2-Washers, 2-Nuts,
(SCREW/ WASHER/ NUT
INCLUDED)
4-Rubbers
(provided as parts of the product)
► Screw: M5 x L (*L: Table depth + 8~10 mm)
ex) Table depth: 15mm, Screw: M5 x 25
Stand
Stand
Desk
Desk
► You can select any type of attachment (Type 1 or Type 2).
► Do not over tighten.
2 SCREW SET
(SCREW/ WASHER/ NUT
INCLUDED)
18
Stand
4-Screws
(not provided as parts
of the product)
!
!
?
?
PREPARATION
32/37LD310H
Desk
► Screw: M5 x L (*L: Table depth + 8~10 mm) ex) Table depth: 15mm, Screw: M5 x 25
WARNING
► To prevent TV from falling over, the TV should be securely attached to the floor/wall per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking, or rocking the machine may cause injury.
19
PREPARATION
SECURING THE TV TO THE WALL TO PREVENT FALLING
WHEN THE TV IS USED ON A STAND
ꔛ
PREPARATION
ꔛ
You should purchase necessary components to prevent the TV from tipping over (when not using a
wall mount).
Image shown may differ from your TV.
We recommend that you set up the TV close to a wall so it cannot fall over if pushed backwards.
Additionally, we recommend that the TV be attached to a wall so it cannot be pulled in a forward
direction, potentially causing injury or damaging the product.
Caution: Please make sure that children don’t climb on or hang from the TV.
ꔛ
Insert the eye-bolts (or TV brackets and bolts) to tighten the product to the wall as shown in the
picture.
* If your product has the bolts in the eye-bolts position before inserting the eye-bolts, loosen the
bolts.
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts (sold separately) to the wall. Match the height of the bracket
that is mounted on the wall to the holes in the product.
Ensure the eye-bolts or brackets are tightened securely.
ꔛ
!
?
20
Use a sturdy rope (sold separately) to tie the product. It is safer to tie the
rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product.
! NOTE
► Use a platform or cabinet strong enough and large enough to support the size and weight of
the TV.
►
To
? use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and the one on the TV are
the same.
IN 4
H/P
CABLE MANAGEMENT
ANTENNA OR CABLE CONNECTION
1. Antenna (Analog or Digital)
Wall
Antenna
Socket
Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments
ꔡ
(Connect to wall antenna
socket)
WIRELESS
1
IN 4
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT
AC IN
2
/DVI IN
Y
CONTROL
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PB
PR
R
L
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
IN (PC)
Wall Antenna Socket or Outdoor Antenna without a Cable RGB
Box
Connections.
3
LAN
RGB/DVI OPTICAL DIGITAL
For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction if2 needed.
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
PREPARATION
USB IN 1
AV IN 2
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R H/P
ꔛ
L/MONO AUDIO R
To prevent damage do not connect to the power outlet until all connections are made between the
devices.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
USB INVIDEO
2
AC IN
ꔛ
AV IN 2
Outdoor
Antenna
(VHF, UHF)
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
Single-family Dwellings /Houses
(Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)
LAN
WIRELESS
CONTROL
(SERVICE ONLY)
RGB/DVI OPTICAL DIGITAL
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT
2
/DVI IN
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
VIDEO
AUDIO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
2. Cable
1
RS-232C IN
Be careful not to bend the copper wire
when connecting the antenna.
3
2
ꔡ
Copper Wire
RGB IN (PC)
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
Cable TV
Wall Jack
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
ꔛ
ꔛ
If the antenna needs to be split for two TV’s, install a 2-Way Signal Splitter.
For much more information about antennas visit our Knowledgebase at http://lgknowledgebase.
com. Search for antenna.
21
EXTERNAL
EQUIPMENT
SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
SETUP
ꔛ
To prevent the equipment damage, never plug in any power cords until you have finished connecting all
equipment.
ꔛ
This part of EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly use picture of for 32/37/42LD320H.
HD RECEIVER SETUP
This TV can receive digital over-the-air/digital cable signals without an external digital set-top box.
However, if you do receive digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device.
Component Connection
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
1
Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the
digital set-top box to the COMPONENT IN
VIDEO jacks on the TV. Match the jack colors
(Y = green, PB = blue, and PR = red).
2
Connect the audio output of the digital set-top
box to the COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on
RESET
the TV.
Y
2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ
UPDATE
RJP
PR
1
1
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
L
R
2 IN
RS-232C
(SERVICE ONLY)
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
/DVI IN
Turn on the digital set-top box.
(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital settop box operation.)
PB
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
Select the Component input source on the TV
using the INPUT button on the remote control.
Y, CB/PB, CR/PR
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
15.73
59.94
15.73
60.00
31.47
59.94
31.50
60.00
720x480i
720x480p
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
1280x720p
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
Y
PB
VIDEO
AV IN 1
VIDEO
1920x1080i
L/MONO AUDIO R
GAME
CONTROL
PR
L
AUDIO
R
1920x1080p
COMPONENT IN
22
44.96
59.94
45.00
60.00
33.72
59.94
33.75
60.00
TV - LINK
26.97
23.976
27.00
24.00
33.71
29.97
33.75
30.00
67.432
59.94
67.50
60.00
CFG
RJP
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
/DVIIN
2
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
HDMI OUTPUT
RJP
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
1
RGB IN (PC)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
R
RESET UPDATE
RJP
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
/DVI IN
1
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
HDMI Connection
1. How to connect
1
Connect the digital set-top box to HDMI/DVI IN
1 or HDMI 2 jack on the TV.
RJP
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
/DVIIN
2
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
2. How to use
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RJP
ꔛ
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
PB
PR
VIDEO
Turn on the digital set-top box.
1
to AV
the
IN 1owner’s manual for the digital set)
L/MONO
VIDEO
AUDIO R
top box.
AUDIO IN
ꔛ Select the HDMI1 or HDMI2
GAME input source on the
(RGB/DVI)
CONTROL TV - LINK
TV using the INPUT button on CFG
the remote control.
RGB IN (PC)
Y
PB
VIDEO
L
PR
AUDIO
HDMI OUTPUT
R
COMPONENT IN
!
! NOTE
?
► If an HDMI cable doesn’t support High Speed HDMI,
it can cause flickers or no screen display. In this case
? use the latest cables that support High Speed HDMI.
► HDMI Audio Supported Format: Dolby Digital (32 kHz, 44.1
kHz, 48 kHz), Linear PCM (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)
RJP
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
1920x1080p
R
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
2
/DVIIN
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
1
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
HDMI-DTV
Resolution
L
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
REMOTE
(Refer
CONTROL
OUT
SPEAKER
OUT(8 )
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
No separate audio connection is necessary.
HDMI supports both audio and video.
2
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
31.47
59.94
31.50
60.00
44.96
59.94
45.00
60.00
33.72
59.94
33.75
60.00
26.97
23.976
27.00
24.00
33.71
29.97
33.75
30.00
67.432
59.939
67.50
60.00
DVI OUTPUT
L
AUDIO
R
23
DATE
OUT (8 )
Y
RS-232C IN
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
PR
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RJP
PB
VIDEO
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AV IN 1
VIDEO
L/MONO AUDIO R
GAME
CONTROL
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT(8 )
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
TV - LINK
CFG
HDMI OUTPUT
R
COMPONENT IN
DVI to HDMI Connection
1. How to connect
RJP
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
24
2
Connect the DVI output of the digital set-top
box to the HDMI/DVI IN 1 jack on the TV.
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
/DVIIN
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
1
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
Connect the digital set-top box audio output to
the AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
Turn on the digital set-top box.
(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital settop box.)
ꔛ Select the HDMI1 input source on the TV using
the INPUT button on the remote control.
!
! NOTE
?
► A DVI to HDMI cable or adapter is required for this connection. DVI doesn't support audio, so a separate audio
? connection is necessary.
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
2. How to use
ꔛ
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
2
1
DVI OUTPUT
2
L
AUDIO
R
R
DVD SETUP
Component Connection
1. How to connect
Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the
DVD to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO jacks on
the TV. Match the jack colors (Y = green, PB =
blue, and PR = red).
2
Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the
COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on the TV.
RESET UPDATE
2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
/DVI IN
Select the Component input source on the TV
using the INPUT button on the remote control.
Refer to the DVD player’s manual for operating
instructions.
Component Input ports
Component ports on
the TV
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
AUDIO IN
RGB/DVI)
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Video output ports
AV IN 1
on DVD player
L/MONO AUDIO R
GAME
CONTROL
PR
L
AUDIO
PB
RJP
PR
1
1
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
Y
PB
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
/DVIIN
R
(SERVICE ONLY)
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
L
2 IN
RS-232C
RJP
To get better picture quality, connect a DVD
player to the component input ports as shown
below.
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
Y
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
2
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
PR
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
PB
PR
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
Y
PB
PR
Y
B-Y
R-Y
Y
Cb
Cr
Y
Pb
Pr
TV - LINK
CFG
HDMI OUTPUT
R
COMPONENT IN
RJP
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
2
/DVIIN
1
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
R
25
RGB/DVI AUDIO OUT
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
RGB IN (PC)
Y
PB
Composite (RCA) Connection
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
R
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
HDMI OUTPUT
1. How to connect
AV IN 1
VIDEO
L/MONO AUDIO R
1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
PB
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
PR
VIDEO
L
PR
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
GAME
Connect
the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
CONTROL
TV - LINK
CFG Match the jack colors (Video = yellow,
and DVD.
Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red)
R
2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Y
RJP
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
1
Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on the TV
using the INPUT button on the remote control. Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating
instructions.
PR
L
R
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
/DVI IN
PB
RS-232C IN
AV IN 1
L/MONO AUDIO R
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
GAME
CONTROL
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
TV - LINK
CFG
R
COMPONENT IN
RJP
RS-232C IN
RESET UPDATE
1
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
/DVI IN
1
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
VIDEO
HDMI Connection
(SERVICE ONLY)
L
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
R
AUDIO
1. How to connect
1
Connect the HDMI output of the DVD to the
HDMI/DVI IN 1 or HDMI 2 jack on the TV.
RJP
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
No separate audio connection is necessary.
HDMI supports both audio and video.
2
/DVIIN
2
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
1
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
2. How to use
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RJP
Select the HDMI1 or HDMI2 input source on the TV
the INPUT button on the remote control.
AV IN 1
L/MONO AUDIO
Refer VIDEO
to the
DVD
player's manual for operating
R
AUDIO
IN
instructions.
GAME
(RGB/DVI)
CONTROL
RGB IN (PC)
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
PR
L
AUDIO
R
1
REMOTE
using
CONTROL
OUT
ꔛ
Y
PB
VIDEO
COMPONENT IN
ꔛ
SPEAKER
OUT(8 )
Y
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
TV - LINK
CFG
HDMI OUTPUT
R
COMPONENT IN
!
! NOTE
?
► If an HDMI cable doesn’t support High Speed HDMI,
it can cause flickers or no screen display. In this case
? use the latest cables that support High Speed HDMI.
► HDMI Audio Supported Format: Dolby Digital (32 kHz, 44.1
kHz, 48 kHz), Linear PCM (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)
RJP
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
2
/DVIIN
26
RS-232C IN
1
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
R
VCR SETUP
1
(DVI)
DC-IN
2
/DVI IN
DC-IN
/DVI IN
Antenna Connection
1
(DVI)
1. How to connect
RS-232C IN RS-232C IN
(CONTROL&SERVICE)
(CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
AV IN
AUDIO IN DIGITAL AUDIO IN DIGITAL
AV IN
RGB/DVI AUDIO OUTRGB/DVI
L(MONO)
VIDEOAUDIO
OUT AUDIO
VIDEOR L(MONO) AUDIO R
Connect the RF antenna out socket
RGB IN (PC) RGB IN (PC)
of the VCR to the ANTENNA/CABLE
Y
P
VIDEO
IN socket on the TV.
B
M. P. I IN
ANTENNA IN ANTENNA
YPR
PBL
PRR
AUDIO
VIDEO
M. P. I
1
L
AUDIO
R
ANT OUT
COMPONENTCOMPONENT
IN
IN
2
ANT IN
Connect the antenna cable to the RF
antenna in socket of the VCR.
ꔛ
OUTPUT
ANT IN
SWITCH
L
AUDIO
R
OUTPUT
SWITCH
Wall Jack
2
2. How to use
ꔛ
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEOL VIDEOR
ANT OUTVIDEO
AUDIO
Set VCR output switch to 3 or 4 and
then tune TV to the same channel number.
Insert a video tape into the VCR and
press PLAY on the VCR (Refer to the
VCR owner’s manual).
Antenna
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
2
Composite (RCA) Connection
1. How to connect
1
RJP
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
RESET UPDATE
RESET UPDATE
and VCR. Match the jack
colors (Video = yellow,
Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red) 2
2
2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ
!
?
/DVI IN
1
/DVI IN
1
RJP
RS-232C IN
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AUDIO IN
RGB/DVI
VIDEO
REMOTE
CONTROL
AV IN 1
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
SPEAKER
COMPONENT IN
ANT IN
ANT OUT
►If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable
from the VCR to the AUDIO L(MONO) jack of the TV.
AV IN 1
L/MONO AUDIO R
R
Y
GAME
CONTROL
ANTENNA/
PB
PR
L
AUDIO
CABLE IN
VIDEO
TV - LINK
CFG
R
COMPONENT IN
on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.)
Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on the TV
using the INPUT button on the remote control. ! NOTE
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
SPEAKER
Y OUTP(8
B
) PR
)
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press
OUT(8
PLAY
(SERVICE ONLY)
L/MONO AUDIO R OUT
RGB IN (PC)
RGB IN (PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL&SERVICE)
1
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
SWITCH
VIDEO
L
R
S-VIDEO
ANT
IN
AUDIO
ANT OUT
VIDEO
L
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
SWITCH
?
27
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
OTHER A/V SOURCE SETUP
1. How to connect
1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks
between TV and external equipment.
Match the jack colors.
(Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and
Audio Right = red)
2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ
RJP
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET UPDATE
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
/DVI IN
1
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
GAME
CONTROL
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
TV - LINK
CFG
R
COMPONENT IN
Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on
the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.
Operate the corresponding external
equipment.
1
VIDEO
L
R
Video Game Set
Camcorder
28
AV IN 1
L/MONO AUDIO R
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
USB CONNECTION
1. How to connect
2. How to use
ꔛ
After connecting the USB IN jack, you
use the USB function.
or
Memory Key
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Connect the USB device to the USB
IN jack on the side of TV.
USB IN
1
29
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
PC SETUP
VGA (D-Sub 15 Pin) Connection
RS-232C IN
RJP
1. How to connect
RESET
(SERVICE ONLY)
UPDATE
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Connect the VGA output of the PC to the
RGB IN (PC) jack on the TV.
/DVI IN
1
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
GAME
CONTROL
PB
PR
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
COMPONENT IN
2
Connect PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
2. How to use
ꔛ
ꔛ
1
2
RGB OUTPUT
AUDIO
Turn on the PC and the TV.
Select the RGB-PC input source on the TV using
the INPUT button on the remote control.
RS-232C IN
RESET
(CONTROL&SERVICE)
UPDATE
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
2
/DVI IN
RGB IN (PC)
1
Y
SPEAKER
OUT(8 )
DVI OUTPUT
30
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN
RGB/DVI
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
AUDIO
R
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
TV - LINK
CFG
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
RS-232C IN
E
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
Y
PB
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
AV IN 1
VIDEO
L/MONO AUDIO R
GAME
CONTROL
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT(8 )
PR
COMPONENT IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RJP
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
TV - LINK
CFG
HDMI OUTPUT
R
COMPONENT IN
DVI to HDMI Connection
1. How to connect
2
Connect the DVI output of the PC to the
HDMI/DVI IN 1 jack on the TV.
ꔛ
(SERVICE ONLY)
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AV IN
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
2
/DVIIN
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
1
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
2. How to use
ꔛ
RS-232C IN
1
2
Turn on the PC and the TV.
Select the HDMI1 input source on the TV using the
INPUT button on the remote control.
DVI OUTPUT
L
AUDIO
R
R
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
RJP
RESET UPDATE
31
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
!
?
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
32
! NOTE
►To get the the best picture quality, adjust the PC graphics card to 1920 x 1080 (Other models),
1360 x 768 (26/32LD320H, 32LD325H, 32LD310H).
?
►Depending
on the graphics card, DOS mode may not work if a HDMI to DVI Cable is in use.
►In PC mode, there may be noise associated with the resolution, vertical pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is present, change the PC output to another resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and contrast on the PICTURE menu until the picture is clear.
►Avoid keeping a fixed image on the screen for a long period of time. The fixed image may become
permanently imprinted on the screen.
►The synchronization input form for Horizontal and Vertical frequencies is separate.
►Depending on the graphics card, some resolution settings may not allow the image to be positioned on the screen properly.
►When selecting HDMI-PC, set the “Input Label - PC” in the OPTION menu.
Supported Display Specifications (RGB-PC, HDMI-PC)
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
640x350
31.468
70.09
720x400
31.469
70.08
640x480
31.469
59.94
800x600
37.879
60.31
1024x768
48.363
60.00
1280x768
47.776
59.87
1360x768
47.712
60.015
1280x1024
63.981
60.02
1600x1200
75.00
60.00
1920x1080
RGB-PC
66.587
59.934
1920x1080
HDMI-PC
67.50
60.00
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Resolution
Except 26/32LD320H, 32LD325H, 32LD310H
33
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Screen Setup for PC mode
Selecting Resolution
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
You can choose the resolution in RGB-PC mode.
The Position, Phase, and Size can also be adjusted.
You can choose this option only when the PC resolution is set to 1024X768, 1280X768 or 1360X768.
PICTURE
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
SCREEN
Resolution
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Color
60
• Tint
0
R
G
• Color Temp.
0
W
C
Auto Config.
Size
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• Screen (RGB-PC)
Position
ꔠ
ꔉ
Phase
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
34
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Screen (RGB-PC).
ENTER
Select Resolution.
ENTER
Select the desired resolution.
ENTER
ꔂ Move � Prev.
ꔑ 1024 x 768
□ 1280 x 768
□ 1360 x 768
Auto Configure
Automatically adjusts picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the image
is still not correct, try using the manual settings or a different resolution or refresh rate on the PC.
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
• Brightness
50
Resolution
• Sharpness
70
Auto Config.
• Color
60
• Tint
0
R
G
• Color Temp.
0
W
C
Position
Size
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• Screen (RGB-PC)
ꔂ Move � Prev.
Auto Config.
Yes
No
Phase
ꔠ
ꔉ
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ENTER
Select Screen (RGB-PC).
ENTER
Select Auto Config..
ENTER
Select Yes.
ENTER
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
SCREEN
PICTURE
If the position of the image is still not
correct, try Auto adjustment again.
If picture needs to be adjusted again
after Auto adjustment in RGB-PC,
you can adjust the Position, Size or
Phase.
Start Auto Configuration.
35
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Adjustment for screen Position, Size, and Phase
If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment or if text is shaking, adjust the picture phase manually.
This feature operates only in RGB-PC mode.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
PICTURE
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
SCREEN
ꔂ Move � Prev.
Resolution
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Color
60
• Tint
0
R
G
• Color Temp.
0
W
C
Auto Config.
◀
▲
▼
▶
Size
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• Screen (RGB-PC)
Position
ꔠ
ꔉ
Phase
Reset
1
2
3
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Screen (RGB-PC).
ENTER
Select Position, Size, or Phase.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
4
5
36
ENTER
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
Position: This function is to adjust
picture to left/right and up/down as
you prefer.
Size: This function is to minimize any
vertical bars or stripes visible on the
screen background. And the horizontal screen size will also change.
Phase: This function allows you to
remove any horizontal noise and
clear or sharpen the image of characters.
Screen Reset (Reset to original initial values)
Returns Position, Size, and Phase to the default initial settings.
This feature operates only in RGB-PC mode.
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
ꔂ Move � Prev.
Resolution
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Color
60
• Tint
0
R
G
• Color Temp.
0
W
C
Auto Config.
Size
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• Screen (RGB-PC)
Position
ꔠ
ꔉ
Phase
To Set
Yes
No
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
SCREEN
PICTURE
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Screen (RGB-PC).
ENTER
Select Reset.
ENTER
Select Yes.
ENTER
Start Reset.
37
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
The remote control may differ from the images below.
POWER
Turns the TV on from standby or off to standby.
ALARM
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
ALARM
Set the time that the TV will automatically turn
itself on..
TIMER
Select the amount of time before your TV turns
off automatically.
INPUT
TV
Rotates through inputs.
Also switches the TV on from standby.
TIMER
TV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
FLASHBK
Returns to the last TV channel.
INFO
VOL
NUMBER button
— (DASH)
FLASHBK
Used to enter a program number for multiple
program channels such as 2-1, 2-2, etc.
MENU
CC
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left
Right/ENTER)
RETURN
or BACK
GUIDE
EXIT
CH
PORTAL
P
A
G
E
MUTE
GUIDE
MENU
CC
Tunes to the last channel viewed.
ALARM
SAP
Displays the main menu or clears all on-screen
displays and return to TV viewing.
Analog mode: Selects MTS sound (Mono, Stereo,
or a SAP)
DTV mode: Changes the audio language.
Select a closed caption.
Navigates the on-screen menus and adjusts the
system settings to your preference.
Allows the user to move return one step in an
interactive application or other user interaction
function.
Show Channel schedule.
TIMER
INPUT
ENTER
TV
1
SAP
2
EXIT
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
EJECT
FLASHBK
RETURN
RATIO
3
INFO
VOL
PORTAL
CH
MUTE
MENU
Clears all on-screen displays and return to TV
viewing.
GUIDE
CC
ENTER
BACK
38
INPUT
SAP
EXIT
EJECT
RATIO
P
A
G
E
INFO
PORTAL
MUTE
Adjusts the volume.
Displays channel information at the bottom of the screen.
Displays and removes the hotel interactive menu.
Switches the sound on or off.
CHANNEL
UP/DOWN
Changes the channel.
PAGE
UP/DOWN
Moves from one full set of screen information to the next one.
COLOR
BUTTON
VCR/DVD
control
buttons
Access special functions in some menus.
Control video cassette recorders or DVD players.
EJECT
Eject the USB device.
RATIO
Change the aspect ratio.
Installing Batteries
ꔛ
Open the battery compartment cover on the back
side and install the batteries matching correct polarity.
ꔛ
Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Don’t mix old or used
batteries with new ones.
ꔛ
Close cover.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
VOLUME
UP/DOWN
39
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
TURNING ON THE TV
1
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
!
First, connect power cord correctly.
At this moment, the TV switches to standby mode.
ꔛ In
standby mode to turn TV on, press the / I button on the TV or press the
button on the remote control.
2
Select the viewing source by using the INPUT button on the remote control.
3
When finished using the TV, press the
reverts to standby mode.
(POWER) button on the remote control. The TV
! NOTE
►If you intend to be away on vacation, disconnect the power plug from the wall power outlet.
?
?
CHANNEL SELECTION
1
Press the CH (ꕌor ꕍ) or NUMBER buttons to select a channel number.
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the volume to suit your personal preference.
40
(POWER)
1
Press the VOL (+ or -) button to adjust the volume.
2
If you want to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
3
You can cancel the Mute function by pressing the MUTE or VOL (+ or -) button.
ON-SCREEN MENUS SELECTION
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
1
2
3
MENU
Display each menu.
ENTER
Select a menu item.
CHANNEL
4
EXIT
Accept the current selection.
Return to TV viewing.
PICTURE
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
• Auto Tuning
• Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
• Manual Tuning
• Picture Mode
: Standard
• Channel Edit
PICTURE
• Channel Label
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
AUDIO
AUDIO
• Auto Volume
: Off
• Clear Voice II
: Off �3
50
• Tint
60
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
• Clock
• Off Time
• Balance
• Sound Mode
70
• Color
TIME
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
50
• Sharpness
0
L
R
: Standard
TIME
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
: Off
• On TIme
: Off
• Sleep Timer
: Off
• Auto Off
: On
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL
ENTER
• Reset
LOCK
OPTION
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
• Demo Mode
• Set Password
• Lock System
• Language
: On
• Caption
• Block Channel
LOCK
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
: Off
OPTION
: Off
• Eject
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
41
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
i.e)
Input List
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
42
ꔂ Move
TV
AV 1
HDMI2
USB
AV 2
Component
RGB-PC
HDMI1
INPUT
ꕉ Exit
MY MEDIA
MY MEDIA
Fl
Photo List
Music List
Extra Contents
ꔉ Enter
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Picture Test / Sound Test
This function is a customer support function that can execute picture and sound tests.
ꔑ Picture Test
□ Sound Test
? Do you have a problem in this test
screen?
□ Product/Service Info.
No
□ Picture Test
ꔑ Sound Test
? Do you have a sound problem in this
screen?
□ Product/Service Info.
Close
1
MENU
2
3
4
RETURN
EXIT
RED
Select Customer Support.
ENTER
Select Picture Test or Sound Test.
ENTER
Select Yes.
or
BACK
Yes
No
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Yes
Close
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
43
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Product/Service Info.
This function shows support and product information.
Customer Service Center can differ by country.
□ Picture Test
□ Sound Test
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
ꔑ Product/Service Info.
Close
1
MENU
2
3
RETURN
EXIT
44
RED
Select Customer Support.
ENTER
Select Product/Service Info..
You can check the various
product/Service infomation
based on your model.
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
CHANNEL SETUP
Auto Scan (Auto Tuning)
Automatically finds all channels available through antenna or cable inputs, and stores them in memory
on the channel list.
Run this function if you change your residence or move the TV.
Auto Tuning memorizes only the channels available at the time.
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
• Auto Tuning
ꔉ
ꔡ
• Manual Tuning
CHANNEL
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
• Auto Tuning
• Manual Tuning
• Channel Edit
• Channel Edit
• Channel Label
• Channel Label
Antenna
Cable
Check your antenna connection. The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto Tuning.
Start
Close
1
2
3
4
MENU
Select CHANNEL.
ENTER
Select Auto Tuning.
ENTER
Select Start.
ENTER
5
RETURN
EXIT
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL
Run Auto tuning.
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
45
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Add/Delete Channel (Manual Tuning)
When selecting DTV or Cable DTV input signal in Manual Tuning, you can view the on-screen signal
strength monitor to see the quality of the signal being received.
CHANNEL
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
• Auto Tuning
CHANNEL
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
• Auto Tuning
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Manual Tuning
• Channel Edit
• Channel Label
• Manual Tuning
• Channel Edit
• Channel Label
◀ DIGITAL ▶
Select channel type and RF-channel
number.
Channel
2
DTV 2-1
• Signal Strength
• Signal Quality
88%
88%
Add
Close
1
2
3
MENU
Select CHANNEL.
ENTER
Select Manual Tuning.
ꔛ
ꔛ
Select DIGITAL, or ANALOG.
ENTER
4
Select channel you want to
add or delete.
5
ENTER
6
RETURN
EXIT
46
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
or
Select Add or Delete.
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
The TV will ask for a password if
parental control has been activated
(LOCK Menu). Use the password you
set up in the LOCK Menu to allow a
channel search.
The maximum number of channels
the TV can store is 1000.
Channel Editing
The channels in the Channel Edit List are displayed in black and the channels deleted from the Channel
Edit List are displayed in blue.
When a channel number is deleted, it means that you will be unable to select it using CH∧∨button
during TV viewing. If you wish to select the deleted channel, directly enter the channel number with the
NUMBER buttons or select it in the Channel Edit menu.
Channel Edit
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
• Auto Tuning
DIGITAL
• Manual Tuning
• Channel Label
ꔉ CH.Change
2
3
MENU
Select CHANNEL.
ENTER
Select Channel Edit.
ENTER
Select a channel.
4
BLUE
YELLOW
ENTER
CH
P
A
G
E
5
RETURN
EXIT
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Channel Edit
1
Page 1/1
ANALOG
ꔂ Navigation
ꘃ Page Change
ꕉ Return
ꔅ Block/Unblock
ꔅ Add/Delete
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL
Add or delete a channel.
Block or unblock the channel.
You can block/unblock channels even if
you select “Lock system-Off” in the LOCK
menu.
Switch to the chosen channel number.
Move the pages when the channel list is
too long.
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
47
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
INPUT LIST
Only these input signals which are connected to a TV can be activated and selected.
ie)
Input List
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
TV
AV 1
HDMI2
USB
AV 2
Component
RGB-PC
ꔉ Enter
HDMI1
ꕉ Exit
1
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
48
ꔂ Move
INPUT
ENTER
Select the desired input source.
TV: Select it to watch over-the-air, cable and digital cable broadcasts.
AV: Select them to watch a VCR or other external equipment.
Component: Select them to watch DVD or a Digital set-top box.
RGB-PC: Select it to view PC input.
HDMI: Select them to watch high definition devices.
EXAMPLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM GUIDE
This is an example of a typical TV electronic program guide showing available programming.
CHANNEL INDICATOR
Currently tuned channel
and program.
PROGRAMMING GRID
Program listings arranged
in time slots.
DATE/TIME OSD
Shows current Date/Time.
TV PROGRAM
Current program on
selected channel.
K&M
Kids Movies
Channel 01:30 AM
Mon. 29 May 2009 11:07
2:30 AM
17 XYZ
On The Political Scene
18 K&M
Kids Movies
19 PQX
Top Fashions
20 WBD
World Events Today
2:45 AM
3:00 AM
Kids ...
Kids ...
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Kids
New Release
Greatest Hits
EVENT CHANNEL SELECTION
PORTAL INFO
ENTER
CHANNEL LIST
Shows available
channels in numerical
order.
1
2
GUIDE
PROGRAM TITLES
Highlight a title and press
Enter to display additional
program information.
FEATURED ATTRACTION
Highlight and click to get
expanded information.
Select GUIDE button to shows available TV programs.
ENTER
Select a Channel.
49
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL LABEL
Choose preset labels for your channels.
If a channel label is provided on the signal from the broadcasting station, the TV displays a short
name for a channel even if you didn’t preset a label for the channel.
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
• Auto Tuning
• Auto Tuning
• Manual Tuning
• Manual Tuning
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
• Channel Edit
ꔠ
ꔉ
• Channel Label
• Channel Edit
• Channel Label
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
Channel
Logo
◀ DIGITAL 15-3 ▶
No Logo
Close
1
2
3
MENU
Select CHANNEL.
ENTER
Select Channel Label.
ENTER
Select a Channel.
4
Select a channel to set logo.
5
Select the appropriate logo for the channel.
6
RETURN
EXIT
50
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
DEMO MODE
Displays a slide show to explain the various feature of this TV.
OPTION
• Demo Mode
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
:
OPTION
ꔉ
ꔡ
• Language
• Caption
3
• Eject
MENU
Select OPTION.
ENTER
Select Demo Mode.
ENTER
Select On to show the various
feature of the TV.
4
EXIT
• Caption
: Off
□ Off
ꔑ On
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
2
ꔂ Move ꔉ Enter
: Off
• Language
: Off
• Eject
1
• Demo Mode
Return to TV viewing.
After a while, Demo Mode. starts.
If you want to stop the demo, press any
button (Except VOL +, - and MUTE button).
51
MY
MY MEDIA
MEDIA
CONNECTION METHOD
USB Connection
USB IN
1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN jack on the side of TV.
IN 3
Memory Key
H/P
MY MEDIA
52
or
Precautions when using the USB device
MY MEDIA
►Only a USB storage device is recognizable.
►Connecting a USB storage device through a USB hub is not supported.
►A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.
►The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.
► Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device
is working. When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB
storage device may be damaged.
►Only use a USB storage device which has normal music files, image files, or movie files.
►Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT 32 or NTFS file system provided with the Windows operating system. Others may not be recognized.
►Some USB storage devices require a power adapter. The power adapter must be connected in
order to be seen by the TV.
►If a device is not recognized by the TV, try a different cable. Excessively long cables are not supported.
►Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operate properly.
►Please backup important files because data on USB device could be damaged. Data management
is consumer's responsibility and as a result, the manufacturer does not cover data damage.
►If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can
use up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices.
►In case of USB storage devices formatted as NTFS, deletion is not supported.
►File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and file names can be up
to 100 English characters.
►The recommended capacity is 1TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB
memory.
►If a USB external hard disk with a “Energy Saving” function doesn’t work, turn the hard disk off and
on again to make it work properly. Refer to the user manual of the USB external hard disk.
►USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the
movie list.
53
MY MEDIA
ENTRY MODE
The My Media menu will open automatically when you insert a USB drive. My Media can also be
accessed by choosing My Media in the user menu.
On USB device, you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder.
MY MEDIA
Fl
Photo List
MY MEDIA
1
2
3
54
Music List
MENU
Select MY MEDIA.
ENTER
Select Photo List, Music List,
or Extra Contents.
ENTER
Extra Contents
ꔛ
This TV can view JPG image files or play
MP3 audio files.
PHOTO LIST
The On-Screen Display on your model may be slightly different.
Supported photo file: *.JPG
ꔛ Baseline: 64 pixel (width) x 64 pixel (height) to 15360 pixel (width) x 8640 pixel (height)
ꔛ Progressive: 64 pixel (width) x 64 pixel (height) to 1920 pixel (width) x 1440 pixel (height)
ꔛ You can play JPEG files only.
ꔛ Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.
Screen Components
1
2
3
4
5
2
Select MY MEDIA.
MENU
Moves to upper level folder.
Current page/total pages.
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control.
Contents under the folder
focused on 1 .
Current page/total pages of
contents.
ENTER
Select Photo List.
ENTER
1
2
Page 1/1
Photo List
USB 1 XTICK
Drive1
P1
P2
P3
P4
Page 1/1
P5
P6
1
To Music List
2
3
Change
Numbers1
2
3 Mark Mode
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
1
0
4
11
44
2
77
5
7
8
1
22
55
3
88
60
0
9
P7
P8
5
P9
4
� Move
1
MY MEDIA
1
1
2
3
7
8
9
�4 View
� Page Change
5 6
0
Exit
0
3
Move to Music List.
33Change Numbers: Changes the number or thumbnails displayed at a time.
66
Allows you to mark certain files.
99
Return to TV viewing.
0
55
MY MEDIA
Photo Selection
1
Page 1/1
Photo List
USB 1 XTICK
Drive1
Page 1/1
� Move
MY MEDIA
1
To Music List
1
2
3
Change
Numbers1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
0
Mark Mode
1
2
7
8
2
ENTER
3
ENTER
3
�4 View
5 6 � Page Change
0
Select the target folder or drive.
ꔛ
9
Exit
Select the desired
photos.
Photo file is displayed.
Use the CH (ꕌꕍ) button to navigate
in the photo page.
0
Mark Mode
1
Page 1/1
Photo List
Mark Mode
Drive1
USB 1 XTICK
Select the target folder or drive.
Page 1/1
2
3
� Move
1
View Marked
1
2
3
Mark
All
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
0
1
Unmark All
� Mark
4 Exit Mark Mode
1
2
3
8
9
�5 Page
Change
6
4
7
View Marked: Display the selected photo.
2
3Mark All: Mark all photos on the screen.
7
8
35
68
4
90
6Unmark All: Deselect all marked photos.
4
24
57
0
56
9
ENTER
1
Select the desired
photo files.
Mark your desired photo files.
View the marked photo files.
0
1
1
4
0 Exit
ENTER
Exit the Mark Mode.
ꔛ
When one or more photos are
marked, you can view individual
photos or a slide show of the marked
photos. If no photos are marked, you
can view all photos individually or all
photos in the folder in a slide show.
Full Screen Menu
More operations are available in full screen mode.
Page 1/1
Photo List
USB 1 XTICK
Drive1
Page 1/1
� Move
1
Numbers 1
2 Change
3
2
3 Mark Mode
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
0
2
7
8
0
3
6�
Page Change
9
MY MEDIA
1 To Music List
1
� View
4 5
Exit
0
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
◀
▶
◀
Slideshow �
1
BGM �
�
�
2/13
▶
Option
Hide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select the target folder or drive.
2
ENTER
3
ENTER
0
The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size
of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.
9
Exit
ꔛ
Use the CH (ꕌꕍ) button to navigate
in the photo page.
Select the desired photos.
The selected photo is displayed in full size.
57
4
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
ENTER
Select the Slideshow,
◀
BGM, � (Rotate),
▶
� (Zoom In), Option, or Hide.
ꔛ
◀
MY MEDIA
▶
MY MEDIA
Slideshow �
BGM �
�
�
2/13
Option
1
▶
Hide
2
4
5
7
8
0
3
6
Use < > button to select the previous or next photo.
9
Exit
► Slideshow: Selected photos are displayed during the slide show. If no photo is selected, all photos
in the current folder are displayed during slide show.
ꔛ Set the time interval of the slide show in Option-Set Photo View. menu.
► BGM (Background Music): Listen to music while viewing photos in full size.
ꔛ Set the BGM device and album in Option-Set Photo View. menu.
► � (Rotate): Rotate photos.
ꔛ Rotates the photo 90 °, 180 °, 270 °, 360 ° clockwise.
ꔛ Photos cannot be rotated if its width is greater than the available supported resolution height.
► � (Zoom In): View the photo by zoom in 2, 4 times by using Blue button.
► Option: Set values for Slide Speed and Music Album.
ꔛ You cannot change Music Album while BGM is playing.
ꔛ You can only select the MP3 folder saved on the device that currently displays the photo.
► Hide: Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
ꔛ To
see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press ENTER button to display.
► Exit: Move to the previous menu screen.
58
Using the Photo List Function
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
Choose options.
Set Photo View.
◀
▶
Set Video.
Set Audio.
Close
Slideshow �
1
BGM �
�
2/13
�
1
▶
Option
Hide
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENTER
Show
the Option menu.
2
ENTER
Select Set Photo View, Set Video, or
Set Audio.
0
!
?
MY MEDIA
◀
Exit
! NOTE
► Option values changed in Photo List do
not affect Music List.
?
Set Photo View Menu Options
Set Photo View.
Slide Speed
◀
BGM
Fast
▶
Drive1
• Repeat
◀
On
▶
• Random
◀
Off
▶
� Previous
1
2
Select Slide Speed or BGM.
Make appropriate adjustments.
59
MY MEDIA
ꔛ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Set Video Menu Options
Set Video.
◀
Picture Mode
1
MY MEDIA
2
▶
• Backlight
70
◀
▶
• Contrast
100
◀
▶
• Brightness
50
◀
▶
• Color
60
◀
▶
• Dynamic Contrast
◀
Medium
▶
• Edge Enhancer
◀
High
▶
• Noise Reduction
◀
Medium
▶
2
4
5
7
8
0
1
Standard
3
6
9
Picture Reset
� Previous
Select Picture Mode.
Make appropriate adjustments.
Set Audio Menu Options
Set Audio.
Sound Mode
◀
Standard
▶
Auto Volume
◀
Off
▶
Clear Voice II
◀
Off
▶
Balance
0 ◀ L
R
▶
� Previous
1
2
60
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear
Voice II, or Balance.
Make appropriate adjustments.
MUSIC LIST
This TV cannot play back copy-protected files.
The On-Screen Display on your model may be slightly different.
MUSIC (*.MP3) supporting file
Bit rate 32 Kbps - 320 Kbps
• Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2.5 Layer3: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz
1
Select MY MEDIA.
MENU
2
ENTER
Select Music List.
ENTER
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Preview: If any album jacket for
the file (Album Art Image)
exists, this picture is displayed.
Moves to upper level folder.
Current page/Total pages.
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control.
Contents under the folder
focused on 1 .
Current page/total pages of
contents.
4
1
4
2
7
5
7
8
1
2
5
3
8
6
0
9
2
Page 1/1
Music List
Drive1
USB 1 XTICK
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
Page 1/1
002. - B02.mp3
00:00
003. - B03.mp3
00:00
4
� Move
1 To Photo List
5
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
2
3 Mark Mode
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
1
Numbers 1
2 Change
3
0
1
MY MEDIA
Screen Components
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
9
� Play
� Page Change
0 Exit
0
3
Move to Photo List.
3Change Numbers: Changes the number or thumbnails displayed at a time.
6
Allows you to mark certain files.
9
Return to TV viewing.
0
61
MY MEDIA
Music Selection
Page 1/1
Music List
Drive1
USB 1 XTICK
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
Page 1/1
002. - B02.mp3
00:00
003. - B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
� Move
1 To Photo List
Numbers1
2 Change
3
4
5 6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
1
9
1
2
7
8
1
2
ENTER
3
ENTER
Select the desired
music file.
Music files are played.
3
�
Play � Page Change
4 5 6
Mark Mode
0
9
Exit
ꔛ
0
MY MEDIA
0
Select the target folder or drive.
Use the CH (ꕌꕍ) button to navigate
in the music page.
Mark Mode
1
Page 1/1
Music List
Mark Mode
Drive1
USB 1 XTICK
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
002. - B02.mp3
00:00
Page 1/1
003. - B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
� Move
1 Play Marked
1
2
1
2
3 Unmark All
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
0
1
3
Mark
All
� Mark
4 Exit Mark Mode
1
2
3
7
8
9
�4 Page
5 6Change
Play Marked: Play the selected songs. Once a
song finishes playing, the next selected one
will be played automatically.
3 Mark All: Mark all songs in the folder.
7
8
35
684
90
6 Unmark All: Deselect all marked song.
4
24
57
62
ENTER
3
ENTER
4
1
Select the desired
music file.
Mark your desired music file.
Play the marked music file.
0
2
0
2
0 Exit
1
1
Select the target folder or
drive.
9 Exit the Mark Mode.
ꔛ
When one or more music files are
marked, the marked music files will
be played in sequence.
Using the Music List Function
Page 1/1
Music List
3 file(s) Marked
Drive1
Choose options.
Page 1/1
Set Audio Play.
�
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
002. - B02.mp3
00:00
002. - B02.mp3
�
�
�
004. - B04 .mp3
00:00
��
�
�
003. - B03.mp3
00:00
�
Play with Photo
�
005. - B05 .mp3
00:00
02:30 / 03:25
Option
Hide
ENTER
Show
the Option menu.
2
ENTER
Select Set Audio Play or Set Audio.
Close
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
9
Exit
!
?
! NOTE
MY MEDIA
1
�
Set Audio.
�
► Option values changed in Music List
does not affect Photo List.
? You can listen to the music only within
►
the device currently played.
Using the remote control
Stop playback.
Return to normal playback.
Paused playback.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Select the previous or next song.
A cursor indicating the position can be played on the screen.
Move to the previous menu screen.
63
MY MEDIA
Set Audio Play Menu Options
Set Audio Play.
Repeat
◀
On
▶
Random
◀
Off
▶
� Previous
MY MEDIA
1
2
Select Repeat or Random.
Make appropriate adjustments.
Set Audio Menu Options
Set Audio.
Sound Mode
◀
Standard
▶
Auto Volume
◀
Off
▶
Clear Voice II
◀
Off
▶
Balance
0 ◀ L
R
▶
� Previous
1
2
64
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear
Voice II, or Balance.
Make appropriate adjustments.
If you don't press any buttons for a while, the play information box
will float across the screen. This prevents screen pixel damage due
to a fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of
time.
ꔛ
002. B02.mp3
� 00:31 / 04:04
?
! NOTE
► Music files with copy-protection will not play.
► Press ENTER or � button to stop the screen saver.
?
MY MEDIA
!
EXTRA CONTENTS
Extra Contents will be activated when Data Channel service is available.
You can play application files from USB device.
Application file on your USB device can be played by this TV.
MY MEDIA
Fl
Photo List
1
2
!
?
Music List
MENU
Select MY MEDIA.
ENTER
ENTER
Select
Extra Contents.
Extra Contents
! NOTE
► Pro: Centric contents in USB memory stick can be played.
► For more information, contact to Customer Support. (www.lgcommercial.com)
?
65
PICTURE
PICTURECONTROL
CONTROL
PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL
This feature lets you choose the way an analog picture with a 4:3 aspect ratio is displayed on your TV.
You can select a different aspect ratio depending on input source (analog broadcasting, digital broadcasting, aux).
PICTURE
PICTURE CONTROL
1
2
3
• Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
• Picture Mode
: Standard
• Backlight
• Contrast
• Brightness
� Enter
: 16:9
: Standard
70
• Backlight
100
• Contrast
50
• Brightness
70
100 ꔑ 16:9
50 □ Just Scan
• Sharpness
70
• Sharpness
70 □ Set By Program
• Color
50
• Color
50 □ 4:3
• Tint
0
• Tint
R
G
Select Aspect Ratio.
ENTER
Select the desired picture format.
EXIT
ꔉ Enter
ENTER
or
ꔂ Move
• Picture Mode
Select PICTURE.
RETURN
PICTURE
• Aspect Ratio
ꔉ
ꔡ
MENU
4
66
� Move
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
0 □ Zoom
ꔉ
ꔡ
4:3
Adjust the picture horizontally, in a linear
proportion to fill the entire screen.
Choose 4:3 when you want to view a picture
with an original 4:3 aspect ratio.
Just Scan
Zoom
Normally the edges of video signals are
cropped 1-2%. Just Scan turns off this
cropping and shows the complete video.
Notes: If there is noise on the edges of the
original signal, it will be visible when Just Scan
is activated.
Just Scan operates only in DTV/Cable DTV/
C o m p o n e n t / H D M I - DT V/ D V I - DT V
(720p/1080i/1080p) input source.
Choose Zoom when you want to view the
picture without any alteration. However, the
top and bottom portions of the picture will
be cropped.
PICTURE CONTROL
16:9
Just Scan
Set By Program
Selects the proper picture proportion to
match the source’s image.
(4:3
4:3)
Set By Program
(16:9
16:9)
Set By Program
67
PICTURE CONTROL
PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS (PICTURE MODE)
There are factory presets for picture settings available in the user menus. You can use a preset, change
each setting manually.
PICTURE
PICTURE CONTROL
1
2
3
ꔂ Move
• Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
• Picture Mode
: Standard
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Color
50
• Tint
0
ꔉ Enter
ꔉ
ꔀ
R
G
PICTURE
ꔂ Move
• Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
• Picture Mode
: Standard
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Color
50
• Tint
0
ꔛ
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Picture Mode.
ENTER
Select Vivid, Standard, Cinema, Sport,
or Game.
ꔛ
Return to the previous menu.
ꔛ
4
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to TV viewing.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
68
ꔉ Enter
□ Vivid
ꔑ Standard
□ Cinema
ꔉ
ꔀ
□ Sport
□ Game
R
G
Vivid, Standard, Cinema, Sport, and
Game Settings are preset for the optimum picture quality at the factory.
Vivid: This is the mode to maximize
the effect of the video in the retail
store. Strengthen the contrast, brightness, color and sharpness for vivid
picture.
Standard: This is the mode to realize
optimum viewing condition for the
general user.
Cinema: This mode optimizes video
for watching movies.
Sport: This is the video mode to
emphasize dynamic video and primary color (e.g, white, uniform, grass,
sky blue etc.) by realizing the optimal
screen for sports.
Game: This is the mode to realize fast
response speed in a fast gaming
screen.
MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT - USER MODE
Adjust the picture appearance to suit your preference and viewing situations.
PICTURE
2
3
4
5
• Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
• Picture Mode
: Standard
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Color
50
• Tint
0
ꔉ Enter
ꔉ
ꔀ
R
ENTER
Select Picture Mode.
ENTER
Select Vivid, Standard, Cinema,
Sport, or Game.
ENTER
Select Backlight, Contrast, Brightness,
Sharpness, Color, Tint, Color Temp., or
Advanced Control.
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
or
BACK
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Return to the previous menu.
ꔛ
EXIT
▶
ꔉ Enter
G
Select PICTURE.
RETURN
70 ◀
ꔡ
MENU
6
ꔠ
• Backlight
Return to TV viewing.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Backlight: This function adjusts the
brightness of the backlight behind
the LCD screen. Adjusting the backlight is recommended when setting
the brightness of the TV. When
decreasing the backlight, the brightness of the black becomes darker
without any loss in video signal and
the power consumption is reduced.
Contrast: Increase or decrease the
gradient of the video signal. You may
use Contrast when the bright part of
the picture is saturated.
Brightness: Adjusts the base level of
the signal in the picture. You may use
Brightness when the dark part of the
picture is saturated.
Sharpness: Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light
and dark areas of the picture. The
lower the level, the softer the image.
Color: Adjusts intensity of all colors.
Tint: Adjusts the balance between
red and green levels.
Color Temp.: Set to warm to enhance
hotter colors such as red, or set to
cool to enhance cooler colors such
as blue.
PICTURE CONTROL
1
ꔂ Move
69
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY
(ADVANCED CONTROL)
Advanced Control allows you to adjust some of the advanced features of your LG display.
To reset to the factory default after making adjustments to each input source, execute the Picture
Reset function for each Picture Mode.
PICTURE
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
ꔂ Move
• Brightness
• Sharpness
• Brightness
70
• Sharpness
70
• Color
60
• Color
• Tint
0
R
G
• Tint
• Color Temp.
0
W
C
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Screen (RGB-PC)
• Screen (RGB-PC)
ꔉ Enter
70
Dynamic Contrast
70
Dynamic
Color
60
R
◀
G
0 W White C
Clear
• Color Temp. 0
Skin Color
• Advanced Control
Noise Reduction
• Picture Reset
Off
0
Off
Digital Noise Reduction
PICTURE CONTROL
Low
Eye Care
Low
ꔍ
Close
3
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Advanced Control.
ENTER
Select your desired menu option.
4
Make appropriate adjustments.
5
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
Off
Medium
Black Level
1
Low
Off
Gamma
2
70
PICTURE
▶
*This feature is not available for all models.
ꔛ
Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness
of the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and
dark parts darker.
ꔛ
Adjusts screen colors so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feature enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue and green
white look more vivid.
Skin Color
ꔛ
It detects the skin area of video and adjusts it to express a natural skin color.
Noise Reduction
ꔛ
Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
Digital Noise
Reduction
ꔛ
Removes noise caused by compressing video.
Dynamic Contrast
Dynamic Color
Gamma
You can adjust brightness of dark areas and middle gray level areas of the
picture.
Low : Make brighter and middle gray level areas of the picture brighter.
Medium : Express original picture levels.
High: Make dark and middle gray level areas of the picture darker.
Black Level
Low: The reflection of the screen gets darker.
High: The reflection of the screen gets brighter.
Auto: Realizing the black level of the screen and set it to High or Low
automatically.
ꔛ Set black level of the screen to proper level.
ꔛ This function is available in the following modes: AV (NTSC-M), HDMI or
Component. Otherwise, “Black level” is set to “Auto”.
Clear White
ꔛ
Make the white area of screen brighter and more white.
ꔛ
Adjust the brightness of the screen to prevent the screen from being too
bright. Dims extremely bright pictures.
This feature is enabled in “Picture Mode-Standard, Sports, Game”.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Real Cinema
ꔛ
PICTURE CONTROL
Eye Care
Makes video clips recorded in film look more natural by eliminating judder
effect.
DVD and Blu-ray movies are filmed at 24 frames per second (fps). With
LG Real Cinema, every frame is consistently processed 5 times in 1/24 of
a second producing 120 fps with TruMotion or 2 times in 1/24 of a second
producing 48 fps without TruMotion, thus totally eliminating the judder
effect.
Advanced Control
ꔛ Maximize the utilization of colors to increase color quality.
Standard: Displays standard set of colors.
Wide: Increase number of colors used.
Color Gamut
Expert Control
ꔛ Displays color domain of the signal.
Standard: Displays standard set of colors.
Wide: Increase number of colors used.
EBU: Mode to display EBU standard color area.
SMPTE: Mode to display SMPTE standard color area.
BT709: Mode to display BT709 standard color area.
71
PICTURE CONTROL
ꔛ
xvYCC
PICTURE CONTROL
72
ꔛ
ꔛ
This is produces richer colors.
This feature represents rich color as much as conventional video signal.
This function is enabled in "Picture Mode - Cinema, Expert" when a xvYCC
signal is inputted through HDMI..
PICTURE RESET
Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.
PICTURE
ꔂ Move
• Brightness
70
• Sharpness 70
picture settings
? • All
Color
60 will be reset.
Continue?
• Tint
0 R
G
• Color Temp.
0
W
Yes
• Advanced
Control
• Picture Reset
• Screen (RGB-PC)
2
3
4
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Picture Reset.
ENTER
Select Yes.
ENTER
EXIT
C
No
ꔉ
ꔀ
PICTURE
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Brightness
70
• Sharpness
70
• Color
60
• Tint
0
R
G
• Color Temp.
0
W
C
• Advanced Control
i Resetting video configuration...
• Picture Reset
• Screen (RGB-PC)
PICTURE CONTROL
1
ꔉ Enter
Initialize the adjusted value.
Return to TV viewing.
73
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUTO VOLUME
Auto Volume makes sure that the volume level remains consistent whether you are watching a commercial or a regular TV program.
Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed
every time the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making
automatic adjustments for each program.
AUDIO
ꔂ Move
• Auto Volume
: Off
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
• Balance
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
74
1
2
3
ꔉ
ꔡ
0
: On
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
• Balance
0
ꔑ On
• Sound Mode
: Standard
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
ENTER
Select On or Off.
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔉ Enter
□ Off
• Infinite Sound: Off
Select Auto Volume.
EXIT
• Auto Volume
: Standard
ENTER
or
R
ꔂ Move
Select AUDIO.
RETURN
L
AUDIO
• Sound Mode
MENU
4
ꔉ Enter
L
R
ꔠ
ꔉ
CLEAR VOICE II
By differentiating the human sound range from others, it improves the sound quality of voices.
AUDIO
ꔂ Move
• Auto Volume
: Off
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
• Balance
1
3
: Standard
ꔉ
ꔀ
0
L
R
• Auto Volume
: Off
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
• Balance
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
ENTER
Select Clear Voice II.
ENTER
Select On or Off.
Adjustment for Clear Voice Level
with selecting On
Select Level.
ꔉ Enter
• Clear Voice II
L
0• Level
: Standard
Select AUDIO.
5
ꔂ Move
• Sound Mode
MENU
4
AUDIO
R
◀
�3
-
Off
▶
+
Close
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
2
• Sound Mode
ꔉ Enter
Make appropriate adjustments.
6
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
75
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
BALANCE
Adjust the left/right sound of speaker to suit your taste and room situations.
AUDIO
ꔂ Move
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
76
2
3
: Off
• Auto Volume
: Off
: Off � 3
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
0
L
ꔀ
R ꔉ
: Standard
• Sound Mode
: Standard
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
Select Balance.
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
EXIT
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔉ Enter
• Balance
0 ◀
L
R
0ꔉ
ENTER
or
• Balance
• Sound Mode
Select AUDIO.
RETURN
ꔂ Move
• Clear Voice II
MENU
4
AUDIO
• Auto Volume
• Balance
1
ꔉ Enter
Close
L
R
▶
PRESET SOUND SETTINGS (SOUND MODE)
Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any special adjustment using factory presets.
AUDIO
ꔂ Move
3
ꔂ Move
: Off
• Auto Volume
: Off
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
0
L
R
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Balance
• Sound Mode
: Standard
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Sound Mode
: Standard
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
• Reset
• Reset
• Treble
Select AUDIO.
ꔛ
ENTER
Select Sound Mode.
ꔛ
ENTER
Select Standard, Music, Cinema,
Sport, or Game.
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔑ Standard
L
□0 Music
ꔉ
R
ꔡ
□ Cinema
• Infinite Sound□
: Off
Sport
MENU
4
ꔉ Enter
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
50 Game
□
50
Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport, and
Game are preset for optimum sound
quality at the factory.
You can also adjust Sound Mode in
the Q.MENU.
Standard: Offers standard-quality
sound.
Music: Optimizes sound for listening
to music.
Cinema: Optimizes sound for
watching movies.
Sport: Optimizes sound for watching
sports events.
Game: Optimizes sound for playing
games.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
2
AUDIO
• Auto Volume
• Balance
1
ꔉ Enter
77
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT - USER MODE
Adjust the sound to suit your taste and room situations.
AUDIO
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
AUDIO
ꔂ Move
• Auto Volume
: Off
• Auto Volume
: Off
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
• Clear Voice II
: Off � 3
• Balance
0
L
R
• Balance
0
ꔉ Enter
L
R
• Sound Mode
: Standard
• Sound Mode
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Infinite Sound
• Infinite Sound: Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
• Bass
50
• Bass
• Reset
• Reset
ꔉ
ꔀ
: Standard
50 • Treble
50 • Bass
Off
50
◀
▶
50
Close
1
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
2
3
4
ꔛ
ENTER
Select Sound Mode.
ENTER
Select Standard, Music, Cinema,
Sport, or Game.
ꔛ
Select Infinite Sound, Treble, or Bass.
ENTER
ꔛ
5
Make appropriate adjustments.
ENTER
6
RETURN
EXIT
78
Select AUDIO.
MENU
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
If sound quality or volume is not at
the level you want, it is recommended
to use a separate home theater system or amp to cope with different
user environments.
If you select “Clear Voice II-On”, the
Infinite Sound feature will not operate.
Infinite Sound: Infinite Sound is a
patented LG proprietary sound processing technology that strives
immersive 5.1 surround sound with
just two front speakers.
AUDIO RESET
Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.
AUDIO
• Clear Voice II
ꔂ Move
: Off � 3
• Balance
L
• Balance
R
0
: Standard
• Infinite Sound:Off
• Treble
• Bassi
• Reset
• TV Speaker
: On
• Bass
Yes
50
• Reset
No
ꔉ
ꔀ
: On
MENU
Select AUDIO.
ENTER
Select Reset.
ENTER
Select Yes.
4
ENTER
L
R
50
50 audio configuration...
Resetting
Initialize the adjusted value.
Return to TV viewing.
EXIT
TV SPEAKERS ON/OFF SETUP
If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers.
AUDIO
• Clear Voice II
ꔂ Move
2
3
AUDIO
: Off � 3
• Balance
1
ꔉ Enter
• Sound Mode
: Standard
ꔂ Move
• Clear Voice II
0
L
: Off � 3
• Balance
R
0
• Sound Mode
: Standard
• Infinite Sound:Off
• Infinite Sound:Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
• TV Speaker
: On
• TV Speaker
: On
MENU
Select AUDIO.
ENTER
Select TV Speaker.
ENTER
Select On or Off.
ꔠ
ꔉ
4
RETURN
EXIT
or
ꔉ Enter
BACK
L
R
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
0
ꔉ Enter
: Off � 3
• Sound Mode
• TV Speaker
2
ꔂ Move
• Clear Voice II
• Sound Mode
: Standard
? All audio settings will be resetted.
• Infinite Sound:Off
Continue?
• Treble
50
1
AUDIO
ꔉ Enter
□ Off
ꔑ On
ꔠ
ꔉ
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
79
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUDIO LANGUAGE
This feature operates only in DTV/Cable DTV mode.
OPTION
• Demo Mode
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
: Off
• Language
• Caption
: Off
• Demo Mode
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Eject
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
1
2
3
Select OPTION.
ENTER
Select Language.
ENTER
Select Audio Language.
Select your desired language.
5
RETURN
EXIT
80
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔂ Move
: Off
• Language
• Caption
• Eject
MENU
4
OPTION
: Off
ꔉ Enter
Menu Language
English
Audio Language
◀ English ▶
Close
ON-SCREEN MENUS LANGUAGE SELECTION
The menus can be shown on the screen in the selected language.
OPTION
• Demo Mode
ꔂ Move
: Off
: Off
• Eject
2
3
MENU
Select OPTION.
ENTER
Select Language.
ENTER
Select Menu Language.
Select your desired language.
From this point on, the on-screen menus
will be shown in the selected language.
4
5
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
ꔂ Move
: Off
• Language
• Caption
• Eject
: Off
ꔉ Enter
Menu Language
◀ English ▶
Audio Language
English
Close
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
1
OPTION
• Demo Mode
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Language
• Caption
ꔉ Enter
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
81
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
CAPTION MODE
Analog Broadcasting System Captions
Captions are provided to help the hearing impaired watch TV. Select a caption mode for displaying
captioning information if provided on a program. Analog caption displays information at any position
on the screen and is usually the program's dialog. Caption/Text, if provided by the broadcaster, would
be available for both digital and analog channels on the Antenna/Cable. This TV is programmed to
memorize the caption/text mode which was last set when you turned the power off. This function is
only available when Caption Mode is set On.
OPTION
ꔂ Move
• Demo Mode
ꔉ Enter
: Off
ꔂ Move
• Demo Mode
• Language
• Caption
OPTION
: Off
• Language
: Off
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Eject
• Caption
: Off
• Eject
◀
ꔉ Enter
On
Mode
▶
CC1
Digital Option
Close
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
1
2
3
MENU
Select OPTION.
ENTER
Select Caption.
ENTER
Select On.
4
Select CC1-4 or Text1-4.
5
RETURN
EXIT
82
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
When selecting Off, Sub-menus for
Analog, DTV, and Digital Option
become disabled.
Caption
The term for the words that scroll
across the bottom of the TV screen;
usually the audio portion of the program provided for the hearing
impaired.
Text
The term for the words that appear in
a large black frame and almost cover
the entire screen; usually messages
provided by the broadcaster.
Digital Broadcasting System Captions
Choose the language you want the DTV/Cable DTV Captions to appear in.
Other Languages can be chosen for digital sources only if they are included on the program.
This function in only available when Caption Mode is set On.
OPTION
ꔂ Move
• Demo Mode
ꔉ Enter
: Off
• Demo Mode
• Language
• Caption
OPTION
ꔂ Move
: Off
• Language
: Off
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Eject
• Caption
• Eject
: Off
◀
ꔉ Enter
On
Mode
▶
CC1
Digital Option
Close
2
3
MENU
Select OPTION.
ENTER
Select Caption.
ENTER
Select On.
4
Select CC1-4, Text1-4, or Service1 - 6.
5
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
1
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
83
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Caption Option
Customize the DTV/Cable DTV captions that appear on your screen.
This function in only available when Caption Mode is set On.
◀
OPTION
ꔂ Move
• Demo Mode
ꔉ Enter
Font 1
Text Color
: Off
◀
• Eject
On
Mode
■ White
Text Opacity
▶
Solid
Bg Color
CC1
Digital Option
Close
▶
A Standard
Font
: Off
• Language
• Caption
Custom
Size
■ Black
Bg Opacity
Solid
Edge Type
None
Edge Color
■ Black
Close
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
1
Select OPTION.
MENU
ꔛ
2
3
ꔛ
ꔛ
Select On.
ENTER
4
5
Select Caption.
ENTER
Select Digital Option.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Select Custom.
ENTER
Customize the Size, Font, etc., to your
preference. A preview icon is provided
at the bottom of the screen, use it to
see the caption language.
6
7
RETURN
EXIT
84
ꔛ
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔛ
Size: Set the word size.
Font: Select a typeface for the text.
Text Color: Choose a color for the
text.
Text Opacity: Specify the opacity for
the text color.
Bg (Background) Color: Select a
background color.
Bg (Background) Opacity: Select the
opacity for the background color.
Edge Type: Select an edge type.
Edge Color: Select a color for the
edges.
TIME SETTING
CLOCK SETTING
Auto Clock Setup
The time is set automatically from a digital channel signal.
The digital channel signal includes information for the current time provided by the broadcasting station.
Set the clock manually if the current time is set incorrectly by the auto clock function.
TIME
ꔂ Move
• Clock
ꔉ Enter
ꔉ
• Off Time
: Off
• On TIme
• Sleep Timer
• Auto Off
ꔡ
TIME
ꔂ Move
• Clock
ꔉ Enter
◀
Auto
▶
• Off Time
: Off
: Off
• On TIme
: Off
: Off
• Sleep Timer
: Off
Date
21
: On
• Auto Off
: On
Year
2010
Hour
10 AM
Month
02
Minute
10
Time Zone
Eastern
Daylight Saving
Auto
Close
2
3
MENU
Select TIME.
ENTER
Select Clock.
ENTER
Select Auto.
4
TIME SETTING
1
Select your viewing area time zone.
5
Select Auto, Off, or On (depending
on whether or not your viewing area
observes Daylight Saving time).
6
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
85
TIME SETTING
Manual Clock Setup
If the current time setting is wrong, reset the clock manually.
TIME
ꔂ Move
• Clock
ꔉ Enter
ꔉ
• Off Time
: Off
• On TIme
• Sleep Timer
• Auto Off
ꔡ
TIME
ꔂ Move
• Clock
ꔉ Enter
◀
Manual
: Off
: Off
• On TIme
: Off
: Off
• Sleep Timer
: Off
Date
21
: On
• Auto Off
: On
Year
2010
Hour
10 AM
Month
02
Minute
10
Time Zone
Eastern
Daylight Saving
Auto
Close
TIME SETTING
1
2
3
MENU
Select TIME.
ENTER
Select Clock.
ENTER
Select Manual.
4
Select the Year, Month, Date, Hour, or Minute
option.
5
Set the Year, Month, Date, Hour, or Minute
option.
6
RETURN
EXIT
86
or
BACK
▶
• Off Time
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING
This function operates only if the current time has been set.
The Off Time function overrides the On Time function if they are both set to the same time.
The TV must be in standby mode for the On Time to work.
TIME
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Clock
TIME
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Clock
• Off Time
: Off
• On TIme
: Off
• Sleep Timer
: Off
• Sleep Timer
• Auto Off
: On
• Auto Off
ꔉ
ꔀ
ꔎ Feb. 21, 2010 10:10 AM
• Off Time
: Off
• On TIme
: 6:30 AM (Once)ꔉ
Repeat
: Off
Hour
: On
Minute
◀ Once ▶
6 AM
30
Close
2
3
MENU
Select TIME.
ENTER
Select Off Time or On Time.
ENTER
Select Repeat.
4
TIME SETTING
1
Select Off, Once, Daily, Mon.~Fri.,
Mon.~Sat., Sat.~ Sun., or Sun..
5
Select and set Hour or Minute.
6
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
87
TIME SETTING
SLEEP TIMER SETTING
The Sleep Timer turns the TV off at the preset time.
Note that this setting is cleared when the TV is turned off.
TIME
ꔂ Move
TIME
ꔉ Enter
• Clock
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Clock
• Off Time
: Off
• Off Time
: Off
• On TIme
: Off
• On TIme
: Off
• Sleep Timer
: Off
• Sleep Timer
: Off
• Auto Off
: On
• Auto Off
: On
ꔉ
ꔀ
ꔑ Off
ꔉ
ꔡ
□ 10 min.
□ 20 min.
□ 30 min.
□ 60 min.
□ 90 min.
□ 120 min.
□ 180 min.
□ 240 min.
1
2
3
4
MENU
Select TIME.
ENTER
Select Sleep Timer.
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
RETURN
EXIT
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔛ
To cancel the Sleep Timer, select Off.
TIME SETTING
AUTO SHUT-OFF SETTING
If set to on and there is no input signal, the TV turns off automatically after 15 minutes.
TIME
ꔂ Move
TIME
ꔉ Enter
• Clock
1
2
3
88
or
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Clock
• Off Time
: Off
• Off Time
: Off
• On TIme
: Off
• On TIme
: Off
• Sleep Timer
: Off
• Sleep Timer
: Off
• Auto Off
: On
• Auto Off
: On
MENU
Select TIME.
ENTER
Select Auto Off
ENTER
Select On or Off.
ꔠ
ꔉ
4
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
□ Off
ꔉ
ꔑ Onꔡ
ꔠ
ꔉ
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Parental Control can be used to block specific channels, ratings and other viewing sources.
The Parental Control Function (V-Chip) is used to block program viewing based on the ratings sent by
the broadcasting station. The default setting is to allow all programs to be viewed. Viewing can be
blocked by choosing the type of the program and the categories. It is also possible to block all program viewing for a time period. To use this function, the following must be done :
1. Set ratings and categories to be blocked.
2. Specify a password
3. Enable the lock
V-Chip rating and categories
Rating guidelines are provided by broadcasting stations. Most television programs and television movies can be blocked by TV Rating and/or Individual Categories. Movies that have been shown at the
theaters or direct-to-video movies use the Movie Rating System (MPAA) only.
Ratings for Television programs including made-for-TV movies:
TV-G (General audience)
TV-PG (Parental guidance suggested)
ꔛ TV-14 (Parents strongly cautioned)
ꔛ TV-MA (Mature audience only)
ꔛ TV-Y
(All children)
ꔛ TV-Y7 (Children 7 years older)
ꔛ
ꔛ
SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM
Set up blocking schemes to block specific channels, ratings, and external viewing sources.
A password is required to gain access to this menu.
LOCK
ꔂ Move
• Set Password
1
2
MENU
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
9
0
ꔉ
• Lock System
: On
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
ENTER
ꔉ Enter
Select LOCK.
Input the password.
ꔡ
Enter Password
*
*
*
*
Close
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
Setting up Your Password
Enter the password as requested.
The TV is set up with the initial
password “0-0-0-0”.
If you forget your password, press
“0-3-2-5” on the remote control.
89
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password
Change the password by inputting a new password twice.
LOCK
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
1
2
: On
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ꔡ
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
90
4
• Block Channel Confirm
• Movie Rating
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
• Input Block
ENTER
Select LOCK.
Input the password.
1
2
5
6
8
9
0
5
RETURN
EXIT
3
4
7
or
New
• Block Channel
Select Set Password.
ENTER
• Set Password
: On
0
3
ꔂ Move
• Lock System
MENU
1
ꔉ
• Lock System
LOCK
Choose any 4 digits for your new
password.
As soon as the 4 digits are entered,
re-enter the same 4 digits on the
Confirm.
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔉ Enter
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Close
Lock System
Enables or disables the blocking scheme you set up previously.
LOCK
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Set Password
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Lock System
: On
• Block Channel
□ Off
: Onꔉ
ꔑ On
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
• Input Block
ENTER
MENU
1
LOCK
ꔉ
ꔀ
Select LOCK.
• Lock System
ꔛ
ꔠ
ꔉ
When you select On, the Lock
System is enable.
Input the password.
0
3
Select On or Off.
ENTER
5
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
4
Select Lock System.
91
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
CHANNEL BLOCKING
Blocks any channels that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.
Block Channel
LOCK
ꔂ Move
DIGITAL
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
• Lock System
: On
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
page 1/1
ꔉ
ꔀ
ꔉ CH.Change
ꔂ Navigation
ꘃ Page Change
ꕉ Return
ꔅ Block/Unblock
1
ENTER
MENU
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Select LOCK.
Input the password.
0
3
4
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
92
Select Block Channel.
Select a channel to block or unblock.
ENTER
5
YELLOW
6
RETURN
EXIT
Block or unblock a channel.
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔛ
If a channel is locked, enter the
password to unlock it temporarily.
MOVIE & TV RATING
Movie Rating (MPAA)
Blocks movies according to the movie ratings limits specified, so children cannot view certain movies.
You can set the ratings limit by blocking out all the movies with the ratings above a specified level.
Keep in mind that the movie ratings limit only applies to movies shown on TV, not TV programs, such
as soap operas.
LOCK
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
LOCK
ꔂ Move
• Set Password
• Lock System
: On
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
ꔉ
ꔀ
• Lock System
: On
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
ꔉ Enter
Blocking off : Permits all
programs
G
PG
• TV Rating-Children
PG-13
• TV Rating-General
R
• Downloadable Rating
NC-17
• Input Block
X
Blocking Off ꔓ
1
2
ENTER
MENU
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
9
Select LOCK.
Input the password.
0
4
ꔛ
ꔛ
Select Movie Rating.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Select G, PG, PG-13, R, NC-17, X, or
Blocking Off.
ENTER
5
ꔛ
ꔛ
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔛ
If Movie Rating, TV Rating-Children
or TV Rating-General is locked, enter
the password to unlock it temporarily.
G (General audience)
PG (Parental guidance suggested)
PG-13 (Parents strongly cautioned)
R (Restricted)
NC-17 (No one 17 and under admitted)
X (Adult only)
Blocking Off (Permits all programs)
If you set PG-13: G and PG movies
will be available, PG-13, R, NC-17 and
X will be blocked.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
3
ꔛ
93
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
TV Rating Children
revents children from watching certain children's TV programs, according to the ratings limit set. The
P
children rating does not apply to other TV programs. Unless you block certain TV programs intended
for mature audiences in the TV Rating - sub menu, your children can view those programs.
LOCK
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
1
2
• Lock System
: On
• Block Channel
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
• Input Block
ENTER
ꔉ
ꔀ
Select LOCK.
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
94
3
5
ꔛ
ꔛ
1
Input the password.
Select TV Rating-Children.
ENTER
Select Age or Fantasy Violence.
ENTER
Select block options.
6
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
: On
MENU
7
ꔂ Move
• Lock System
0
4
LOCK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
Age
ꔉ
Fantasy Violence
Close
Age (applies to TV-Y, TV-Y7)
Fantasy Violence (applies to TV-Y7)
TV Rating General
Based on the ratings, blocks certain TV programs that you and your family do not want to view.
LOCK
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ꔂ Move
• Set Password
: On
• Lock System
: On
• Block Channel
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• TV Rating-General Violence
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
• Input Block
ENTER
ꔉ
ꔀ
Select LOCK.
Input the password.
ꔛ
ꔛ
5
ꔛ
Select TV Rating-General.
ꔛ
ENTER
Select Age, Dialogue, Language, Sex,
or Violence.
ENTER
Select block options.
6
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔉ
Dialogue
ꔛ
Close
Age (applies to TV-G,T V-PG,T V14,TV-MA).
Dialogue-sexual dialogue (applies to
TV-PG,TV-14).
Language-adult language (applies to
TV-PG, TV-14, TV-MA).
Sex-sexual situations (applies to
TV-PG, TV-14, TV-MA).
Violence (applies to TV-PG, TV-14,
TV-MA).
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
4
Age
Language
• TV Rating-Children Sex
0
3
ꔉ Enter
• Lock System
MENU
1
LOCK
95
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
DOWNLOADABLE RATING
This
function is available only for digital channels.
This function operates only when TV has received Region5 Rating data.
LOCK
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
LOCK
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
• Set Password
• Lock System
: On
• Lock System
: On
• Block Channel
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
• Movie Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
ꔉ
Sport
Cruelty
• TV Rating-Children
Language
• TV Rating-General
Sadness
• Downloadable Rating
Genre
• Input Block
Age
ꔉ
ꔀ
Humor
ꔍ
Close
ꔛ
1
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Select LOCK.
Input the password.
0
3
4
5
Select Downloadable Rating.
ENTER
Select desired Downloadable Rating
option.
ENTER
Select desired option and block it.
6
RETURN
EXIT
96
ENTER
MENU
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ꔛ
Based on rating table, your TV's
OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from what is shown in
this manual.
If a Downloadable rating is locked,
enter the password to unlock it temporarily.
EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING
Enables you to block an input.
LOCK
ꔂ Move
ꔉ Enter
LOCK
ꔂ Move
• Lock System
: On
• Lock System
• Block Channel
• AV1
• Block Channel
• Movie Rating
• AV2
• Movie
Rating
• TV Rating-Children
• TV Rating-General
• TV Rating-Children
• Component
• Downloadable Rating
• Input Block
ꔉ
ꔀ
ꔉ Enter
: On
◀
Off
▶
Off
• TV Rating-General
• RGB-PC
• Downloadable Rating
• HDMI1
• Input
Block
• HDMI2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Close
i.e)
1
2
ENTER
MENU
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
9
Select LOCK.
Input the password.
0
4
Select Input Block.
Select input source.
ENTER
5
Select On or Off.
6
RETURN
EXIT
or
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
3
97
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Abnormal Operation
ꔛ
The remote control
doesn’t work
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
TV turns off suddenly
ꔛ
ꔛ
Check to see if there is any object between the product and the remote
control causing obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control
directly at the TV.
Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).
Ensure that the correct remote operating mode is set: TV, VCR etc.
*This feature is not available for all models.
Install new batteries.
Is the sleep timer set?
Check the power control settings. Power interrupted.
Video Problems
ꔛ
ꔛ
No picture &No sound
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Picture appears slowly
after switching on
APPENDIX
No or poor color or
poor picture
Poor reception on
some channels
Lines or streaks in pictures
No picture when connecting HDMI
98
ꔛ
This is normal, the image is muted during the product startup process.
Please contact your service center, if the picture has not appeared after
five minutes.
ꔛ
Adjust Color in menu option.
Keep a sufficient distance between the product and the VCR.
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
Are the video cables installed properly?
Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
ꔛ
Horizontal/vertical bars
or picture shaking
Check whether the product is turned on.
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
Is the power cord inserted into wall power outlet?
Check your antenna direction and/or location.
Test the wall power outlet, plug another product’s power cord into the
outlet where the product’s power cord was plugged in.
ꔛ
Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power
tool.
ꔛ
ꔛ
Station or cable product experiencing problems, tune to another station.
Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station.
Check for sources of possible interference.
ꔛ
Check antenna (Change the direction of the antenna).
ꔛ
If an HDMI cable doesn’t support High Speed HDMI, it can cause flickers or no screen display. In this case use the latest cables that support
High Speed HDMI.
ꔛ
Audio Problems
No output from one
of the speakers
Unusual sound from
inside the product
No sound
when connecting
HDMI/USB
ꔛ
Adjust Balance in menu option.
ꔛ
A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual
noise when the product is turned on or off and does not indicate a fault
with the product.
ꔛ
Check High Speed HDMI cable.
Check USB cable over version 2.0.
Use normal MP3 file.
*This feature is not available for all models.
ꔛ
ꔛ
PC Mode Problems
The signal is out of
range
Vertical bar or stripe
on
background &
Horizontal Noise &
Incorrect position
Screen color is unstable or single color
ꔛ
Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency on the PC.
Check the input source.
ꔛ
Activate the Auto configure feature or adjust size, phase, or H/V position.
(Option)
ꔛ
Check the signal cable.
Reinstall the PC video card.
ꔛ
ꔛ
Check the manual for the video card in the PC to see if it supports
HDMI audio and how to set it up properly.
APPENDIX
When connecting the
HDMI cable to the PC,
there is no audio.
ꔛ
99
APPENDIX
MAINTENANCE
Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can extend the amount of time you
can enjoy your new TV.
Caution: Be sure to turn the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.
Cleaning the Screen
1
ere’s a great way to keep the dust off your screen for a while. Wet a soft cloth in a mixture of
H
lukewarm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it’s
almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen.
2
Make sure the excess water is off the screen, and then let it air-dry before you turn on your TV.
Cleaning the Cabinet
!
ꔛ
ꔛ
!To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
Please be sure not to use a wet cloth.
Absence
? Extended
?
CAUTION
► If you expect to leave your TV dormant for a long time (such as a vacation), it’s a good idea to
unplug the power cord to protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.
APPENDIX
100
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
26LD320H (26LD320H-UA)
32LD320H (32LD320H-UA),
32LD325H (32LD325H-UA)
With stand
667.0 mm x 502.7 mm x 206.8 mm
(26.2 inch x 19.7 inch x 8.1 inch)
805.0 mm x 585.0 mm x 206.8 mm
(31.6 inch x 23.0 inch x 8.1 inch)
Without stand
667.0 mm x 446.2 mm x 80.0 mm
(26.2 inch x 17.5 inch x 3.1 inch)
805.0 mm x 528.2 mm x 108.9 mm
(31.6 inch x 20.7 inch x 4.2 inch)
With stand
9.4 kg (20.7 lbs)
13.1 kg (28.8 lbs)
Without stand
7.7 kg (16.9 lbs)
11.4 kg (25.1 lbs)
1.0 A / 100 W
1.2 A / 120 W
37LD320H (37LD320H-UA),
37LD325H (37LD325H-UA)
42LD320H (42LD320H-UA)
922.0 mm x 650.0 mm x 260.8 mm
(36.2 inch x 25.5 inch x 10.2 inch)
1028.0 mm x 706.4 mm x 260.8 mm
(40.4 inch x 27.8 inch x 10.2 inch)
922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm
(36.2 inch x 23.4 inch x 3.4 inch)
1028.0 mm x 655.0 mm x 88.7 mm
(40.4 inch x 25.7 inch x 3.4 inch)
With stand
15.6 kg (34.3 lbs)
17.9 kg (39.4 lbs)
Without stand
13.0 kg (28.6 lbs)
15.3 kg (33.7 lbs)
1.7 A / 170 W
2.1 A / 210 W
32LD310H (32LD310H-UA)
37LD310H (37LD310H-UA)
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
Weight
Current Value / Power consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
With stand
Without stand
Weight
Current Value / Power consumption
MODELS
With stand
805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 223.8 mm
(31.6 inch x 22.9 inch x 8.8 inch)
922.0 mm x 659.0 mm x 297.0 mm
(36.2 inch x 25.9 inch x 11.6 inch)
Without stand
805.0 mm x 528.2 mm x 108.9 mm
(31.6 inch x 20.7 inch x 4.2 inch)
922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm
(36.2 inch x 23.4 inch x 3.4 inch)
Weight
With stand
12.6 kg (27.7 lbs)
15.0 kg (33.0 lbs)
Without stand
11.4 kg (25.1 lbs)
13.2 kg (29.1 lbs)
1.2 A / 120 W
1.7 A / 170 W
Current Value / Power consumption
Power Requirement
NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM
Program Coverage
VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135
Environment
condition
Operating Temperature
75 Ω
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
Storage Humidity
ꔛ
AC 100-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Television System
External Antenna Impedance
APPENDIX
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
101
APPENDIX
IR CODE
Code
Function
Note
Function
Note
00
CH ꕌ
Remote Control Button
B0
ꕖ
Remote Control Button
01
CH ꕍ
Remote Control Button
B1
ꕗ
Remote Control Button
02
VOL +
Remote Control Button
BA
ꕘ
Remote Control Button
03
VOL -
Remote Control Button
D6
TV
Discrete IR Code
06
>
Remote Control Button
07
<
Remote Control Button
C4
POWER ON
(Hexa)
(Power On/Off)
09
MUTE
Remote Control Button
0B
INPUT
Remote Control Button
0F
TV
Remote Control Button
10-19
Number 0-9
Remote Control Button
1A
FLASHBK
Remote Control Button
AA
INFO
Remote Control Button
28
RETURN or BACK
Remote Control Button
ALAM
Remote Control Button
41
ꕌ
ꕍ
43
MENU
Remote Control Button
44
ENTER
Remote Control Button
0E
TIMER
Remote Control Button
4C
- (Dash)
Remote Control Button
5B
EXIT
Remote Control Button
C3 or 61
BLUE
Remote Control Button
C2 or 63
YELLOW
Remote Control Button
C0 or 71
GREEN
Remote Control Button
C1 or 72
RED
Remote Control Button
79
RATIO
Remote Control Button
PORTAL
Remote Control Button
40
APPENDIX
0C
8F
ꕙ
ꕚ
AB
GUIDE
8E
102
Remote Control Button
Remote Control Button
Remote Control Button
Remote Control Button
CC
Remote Control Button
CA
EJECT
Remote Control Button
0A
SAP
Remote Control Button
Use this feature depending on your models.
Discrete IR Code
(Only Power On)
C5
POWER OFF
Discrete IR Code
(Only Power Off)
5A
AV or AV1
D0
AV2
BF
COMPONENT
Discrete IR Code
(AV1 Input Selection)
Discrete IR Code
(AV2 Input Selection)
Discrete IR Code
(Component Input
Selection)
D5
RGB-PC
Remote Control Button
39
ꔛ
(TV Input Selection)
Remote Control Button
08
E8
Code
(Hexa)
Discrete IR Code
(RGB-PC Input Selection)
CE
HDMI1
Discrete IR Code
(HDMI1 Input Selection)
CC
HDMI2
Discrete IR Code
(HDMI2 Input Selection)
E9
HDMI3
DA
HDMI4
Discrete IR Code
(HDMI3 Input Selection)
Discrete IR Code
(HDMI4 Input Selection)
76
Ratio 4:3
Discrete IR Code
(Only 4:3 Mode)
77
Ratio 16:9
Discrete IR Code
(Only 16:9 Mode)
AF
Ratio Zoom
Discrete IR Code
(Only Zoom Mode)
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51
Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the
software is free for all its users. This General Public License
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software
and to any other program whose authors commit to using
it. (Some other free software foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.)
You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that
you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the
software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent
this, we have made it clear that any patent must be
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0. This license applies to any program or other work which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying
it may be distributed under the terms of this General
Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such
program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this license; they are outside its
scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted,
and the output from the program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the program (independent of having been made by running the program).
Whether that is true depends on what the program
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
program's source code as you receive it, in any medium,
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that
refer to this license and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the program a copy of
this license along with the Program.
APPENDIX
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the program or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) Y
ou must cause the modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
103
APPENDIX
b) Y
ou must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part there of, to be licensed
as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this license.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that
there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user
how to view a copy of this license. (Exception: if the
Program itself is interactive but does not normally
print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this license, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this license,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the program.
APPENDIX
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the program with the Program (or with a work
based on the program) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this license.
3. You may copy and distribute the program (or a work
based on it, under section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed
under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,
104
c) A
ccompany it with the information you received as to
the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial
distribution and only if you received the program in
object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source
code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However,
as a special exception, the source code distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating
system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by
offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from
the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to
copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the
Program except as expressly provided under this license.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or
distribute the Program is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this license. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this license will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this license, since you
have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Program or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this license. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the program (or any work based on the
program), you indicate your acceptance of this license
to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the program or works based
on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the program (or any work
based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties to this license.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this license, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this license. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this license and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy
both it and this license would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose
that choice.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the program under this license may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
license incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this license.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the General Public License from time
to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the program into
other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting
the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
"AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY
AND
FITNESS
FOR
A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO
MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
APPENDIX
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what
is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
license.
the program specifies a version number of this license
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the program does not specify a
version number of this license, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
105
APPENDIX
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to apply these terms to your new programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to
most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each
file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer
to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of
what it does.
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/
or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2 of the license, or (at your option) any later
version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General
Public License along with this program; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth
Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
APPENDIX
106
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice
like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;
for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are
welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type
‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should
show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items-whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers)
written by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating
your program into proprietary programs. If your program is
a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to
permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If
this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this license.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51
Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also
counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software - to make sure
the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to
some specially designated software packages - typically
libraries - of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we
suggest you first think carefully about whether this license
or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library
or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights
that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And
you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent
holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained
for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by
the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the
GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically
or using a shared library, the combination of the two is
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore
permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the
library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License
because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than
the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other
free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the
reason we use the ordinary General Public License for
many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
APPENDIX
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service
if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it; that you can change the software and use pieces
of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that
you can do these things.
that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the
original version, so that the original author's reputation will
not be affected by problems that might be introduced by
others.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special
need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain
library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve
this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library.
A more frequent case is that a free library does the same
job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is
little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only,
so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in nonfree programs enables a greater number of people to use
a large body of free software. For example, permission to
use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as
well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
107
APPENDIX
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and
the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work
that uses the library". The former contains code derived
from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with
the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0.This license agreement applies to any software library or
other program which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may
be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General
Public License (also called “this license”). Each license
is addressed as "you".
A “library” means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
APPENDIX
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or
work which has been distributed under these terms. A
“work based on the Library” means either the Library or
any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a
work containing the library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this license; they are outside its
scope. The act of running a program using the Library
is not restricted, and output from such a program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the library (independent of the use of the Library in a
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what
the library does and what the program that uses the
library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
library's complete source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
108
notices that refer to this license and to the absence of
any warranty; and distribute a copy of this license along
with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed
at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this license.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function
or a table of data to be supplied by an application
program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you
must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the
event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square
roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d
requires that any application-supplied function or table
used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still
compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this license, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
whole which is a work based on the library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this license,
whose permissions for other licenses extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
on the library with the library (or with a work based on
the library) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope
of this license.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU
General Public License instead of this License to a given
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the
notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the
ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of
the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared,
then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do
not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public
License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative
works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the
code of the library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the library (or a portion or
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to
copy the source along with the object code.
However, linking a “work that uses the library” with the
Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the
Library (because it contains portions of the library),
rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable
is therefore covered by this license. Section 6 states
terms for distribution of such executable.
When a “work that uses the library” uses material from
a header file that is part of the library, the object code
for the work may be a derivative work of the library even
though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely
defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessories, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executable containing this object code plus portions of
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the library, you
may distribute the object code for the work under the
terms of Section 6. Any executable containing that work
also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked
directly with the library itself.
6. As an exception to the sections above, you may also
combine or link a "work that uses the library" with the
library to produce a work containing portions of the
library, and distribute that work under terms of your
choice, provided that the terms permit modification of
the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this license. You must supply a
copy of this license. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright
notice for the library among them, as well as a reference
directing the user to the copy of this license. Also, you
must do one of these things:
a) A
ccompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the library
including whatever changes were used in the work
(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2
above); and, if the work is an executable linked with
the Library, with the complete machine-readable
“work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or
source code, so that the user can modify the library
and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files
in the library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking
with the library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1)
uses at run time a copy of the library already present
on the user’s computer system, rather than copying
library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the
user installs one, as long as the modified version is
interface-compatible with the version that the work
was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent
access to copy the above specified materials from
the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user
a copy.
APPENDIX
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of
the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by
being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that
uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside
the scope of this license.
the library will still fall under Section 6.)
109
APPENDIX
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless
that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do
not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on
the library side-by-side in a single library together with
other library facilities not covered by this license, and
distribute such a combined library, provided that the
separate distribution of the work based on the Library
and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,
and provided that you do these two things:
a) A
ccompany the combined library with a copy of the
same work based on the Library, uncombined with
any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of
the fact that part of it is a work based on the library,
and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
APPENDIX
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the library except as expressly provided under
this license. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the library is void, and
will automatically terminate your rights under this
license. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this license will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in
full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this license, since you
have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the library or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this license. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the library (or any work based on the
library), you indicate your acceptance of this license to do
so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the library (or any work based
on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link
with or modify the library subject to these terms and
conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
110
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties with this license.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this license, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this license. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this license and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the library at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the library
by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it
and this license would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply, and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a license cannot impose
that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what
is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
license.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the library is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the
library under this license may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
not thus excluded. In such case, this license incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this license.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the Lesser General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
the library specifies a version number of this license
which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation.
If the library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the library into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software
and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK
AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the
library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line
and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what
it does.
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General
Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2.1 of the license, or (at your
option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser
General Public License along with this library; if not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth
Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
APPENDIX
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO
MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
You can do so by permitting redistribution under these
terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary
General Public License).
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James
Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to apply these terms to your new libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making
111
APPENDIX
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
--------------which, at the time of its release under this license is
not already covered code governed by this license.
1.Definitions.
1.0.1. “Commercial use” means distribution or otherwise
making the covered code available to a third party.
1.1.
“Contributor” means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of modifications.
1.2.
“Contributor version” means the combination of the
original code, prior modifications used by a contributor, and the modifications made by that particular
contributor.
1.3.
“Covered code” means the original code or modifications or the combination of the original code and
modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4.
“Electronic distribution mechanism” means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data.
1.11.
“Source code” means the preferred form of the covered code for making modifications to it, including all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, scripts used to control compilation
and installation of an executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the original code
or another well known, available covered code of the
contributor's choice. The source code can be in a
compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
APPENDIX
1.5.
“Executable” means covered code in any form other
than source code.
1.6.
“Initial developer” means the individual or entity
identified as the initial Developer in the Source Code
notice required by exhibit A.
1.7.
“Larger work” means a work which combines covered
code or portions thereof with code not governed by
the terms of this License.
1.12. “You” (or “Your”) means an individual or a legal
entity exercising rights under, and complying with all
of the terms of, this license or a future version of this
license issued under section 6.1.
For legal entities, “You” includes any entity which
controls, is controlled by, or is under common control
with You. For purposes of this definition, “control”
means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than
fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.
1.8.
“License” means this document.
2. Source Code License.
1.8.1. “Licensable” means having the right to grant, to the
maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the
initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of
the rights conveyed herein.
1.9.
“Modifications” means any addition to or deletion
from the substance or structure of either the original
code or any previous modifications. When covered
code is released as a series of files, a modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a
file containing original code or previous modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the original
code or previous modifications.
1.10. “Original code” means source code of computer
software code which is described in the source code
notice required by exhibit as original code, and
112
1.10.1. “Patent claims” means any patent claim(s), now
owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any
patent licensable by grantor.
2.1.
The initial developer grant.
The initial developer hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third
party intellectual property claims:
a) u
nder intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) licensable by initial developer to
use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the original code (or portions
thereof) with or without modifications, and/or as
part of a larger work; and
(b) under patents claims infringed by the making,
using or selling of original code, to make, have
made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/
or otherwise dispose of the original code (or portions there of).
(c) the licenses granted in this section 2.1(a) and (b)
are effective on the date Initial developer first
distributes original code under the terms of this
license.
(d) Notwithstanding section 2.1(b) above, no patent
license is granted: 1) for code that You delete
from the original Code; 2) separate from the
original code; or 3) for infringements caused by:
i) the modification of the original code or ii) the
combination of the original code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims,
each contributor hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free, non-exclusive license
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1.
Application of license.
The modifications which You create or to which you
contribute are governed by the terms of this license,
including without limitation section 2.2. The source
code version of covered code may be distributed
only under the terms of this license or a future version of this license released under section 6.1, and
you must include a copy of this license with every
copy of the source code you distribute. You may not
3.2. Availability of source code.
Any modification which you create or to which you
contribute must be made available in source code
form under the terms of this license either on the
same media as an executable version or via an
accepted electronic distribution mechanism to anyone to whom you made an executable version available; and if made available via electronic distribution
mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve
(12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent
version of that particular modification has been
made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the source code version remains
available even if the electronic distribution mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of modifications.
You must cause all covered code to which you contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You
made to create that covered code and the date of any
change. You must include a prominent statement that
the modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from
original code provided by the initial developer and
including the name of the initial developer in (a) the
source code, and (b) in any notice in an executable
version or related documentation in which you describe
the origin or ownership of the covered code.
3.4.
Intellectual property matters
(a) Third party claims.
If contributor has knowledge that a license under a
third party's intellectual property rights is required to
exercise the rights granted by such contributor under
sections 2.1 or 2.2, contributor must include a text file
with the source code distribution titled "LEGAL"
which describes the claim and the party making the
claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know
whom to contact. If contributor obtains such knowledge after the modification is made available as
described in section 3.2, contributor shall promptly
modify the LEGAL file in all copies contributor makes
available thereafter and shall take other steps (such
as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups)
reasonably calculated to inform those who received
the covered code that new knowledge has been
obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If contributor's modifications include an application
programming interface and contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, contributor must also
include this information in the LEGAL file.
APPENDIX
(a) u
nder intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) licensable by contributor, to
use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the modifications created by
such contributor (or portions thereof) either on
an unmodified basis, with other modifications, as
covered code and/or as part of a larger work; and
(b) under patent claims infringed by the making,
using, or selling of modifications made by that
contributor either alone and/or in combination
with its contributor version (or portions of such
combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale,
have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) modifications made by that contributor (or portions
thereof); and 2) the combination of modifications
made by that contributor with its contributor version (or portions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b)
are effective on the date contributor first makes
commercial use of the covered code.
(d) Notwithstanding section 2.2(b) above, no patent
license is granted: 1) for any code that contributor
has deleted from the contributor version; 2)
separate from the contributor version; 3) for
infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of contributor version or ii) the combination
of modifications made by that contributor with
other software (except as part of the contributor
version) or other devices; or 4) under patent
claims infringed by covered code in the absence
of modifications made by that contributor.
offer or impose any terms on any source code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of
this license or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, you may include an additional document
offering the additional rights described in section
3.5.
113
APPENDIX
(c) Representations.
contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to section 3.4(a) above, contributor believes that
contributor's modifications are contributor's original
creation(s) and/or contributor has sufficient rights to
grant the rights conveyed by this license.
3.5. Required notices.
You must duplicate the notice in exhibit A in each file
of the source code. If it is not possible to put such
notice in a particular source code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location
(such as a relevant directory) where a user would be
likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or
more modification(s), you may add your name as a
contributor to the notice described in exhibit A. you
must also duplicate this license in any documentation for the source code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to covered
code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee
for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of covered code.
However, you may do so only on your own behalf, and
not on behalf of the Initial developer or any contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such
warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is
offered by you alone, and You hereby agree to
indemnify the Initial developer and every contributor
for any liability incurred by the Initial developer or
such contributor as a result of warranty, support,
indemnity or liability terms you offer.
APPENDIX
3.6. Distribution of executable versions.
You may distribute covered code in executable form
only if the requirements of section 3.1-3.5 have been
met for that covered code, and if you include a notice
stating that the source code version of the covered
code is available under the terms of this license,
including a description of how and where you have
fulfilled the obligations of section 3.2. The notice
must be conspicuously included in any notice in an
executable version, related documentation or collateral in which you describe recipients' rights relating
to the covered code. You may distribute the executable version of covered code or ownership rights
under a license of your choice, which may contain
terms different from this license, provided that you
are in compliance with the terms of this license and
that the license for the executable version does not
attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the
source code version from the rights set forth in this
license. If you distribute the executable version under
a different license you must make it absolutely clear
that any terms which differ from this license are
offered by you alone, not by the Initial developer or
any contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the
initial developer and every contributor for any liability
incurred by the initial developer or such contributor
as a result of any such terms You offer.
3.7.
114
Larger works.
You may create a larger work by combining covered
code with other code not governed by the terms of
this license and distribute the larger work as a single
product. In such a case, you must make sure the
requirements of this license are fulfilled for the covered code.
4. Inability to comply due to statute or regulation.
If it is impossible for you to comply with any of the
terms of this license with respect to some or all of
the covered code due to statute, judicial order, or
regulation then you must: (a) comply with the terms
of this license to the maximum extent possible; and
(b) describe the limitations and the code they affect.
Such description must be included in the LEGAL file
described in section 3.4 and must be included with
all distributions of the source code. Except to the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such
description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.
5. Application of this license.
This license applies to code to which the initial developer has attached the notice in exhibit A and to
related covered code.
6. Versions of the license.
6.1.
New versions.
Netscape communications corporation (“Netscape”)
may publish revised and/or new versions of the
license from time to time. Each version will be given
a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of new versions.
Once covered code has been published under a
particular version of the license, you may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You
may also choose to use such covered code under
the terms of any subsequent version of the license
published by netscape. No one other than netscape
has the right to modify the terms applicable to covered code created under this license.
6.3. Derivative works.
If You create or use a modified version of this license
(which you may only do in order to apply it to code
which is not already covered code governed by this
license), You must (a) rename Your license so that the
phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL",
"Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar
phrase do not appear in your license (except to note
that your license differs from this license) and (b)
otherwise make it clear that Your version of the
license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla
Public license and netscape Public License. (Filling in
the name of the initial developer, original code or
contributor in the notice described in exhibit A shall
not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of
this license.)
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE
OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE
DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE
INITIAL
DEVELOPER
OR
ANY
OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES
AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE
OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1.
This license and the rights granted hereunder will
terminate automatically if you fail to comply with
terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30
days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the covered code which are properly
granted shall survive any termination of this license.
Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in
effect beyond the termination of this license shall
survive.
(a) s uch participant's contributor version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all
rights granted by such participant to you under
sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this license shall, upon
60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of
notice you either: (i) agree in writing to pay participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for
your past and future use of modifications made
by such participant, or (ii) withdraw your litigation
claim with respect to the contributor version
against such participant. If within 60 days of notice,
a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement
are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the
parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the
rights granted by participant to you under sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the
expiration of the 60 day notice period specified
above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such
participant's contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights grant-
8.3. If you assert a patent infringement claim against
participant alleging that such participant's contributor version directly or indirectly infringes any patent
where such claim is resolved (such as by license or
settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the
licenses granted by such participant under sections
2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining
the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under sections 8.1 or 8.2
above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly
granted by you or any distributor hereunder prior to
termination shall survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE,
SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF
COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF
SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE,
COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY
AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL
NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR
PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH
PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT
APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION
AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
APPENDIX
8.2. If you initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions)
against initial developer or a contributor (the initial
developer or contributor against whom you file such
action is referred to as “Participant”) alleging that:
ed to You by such participant under sections
2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the
date you first made, used, sold, distributed, or
had made, modifications made by that participant.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The covered code is a "commercial item," as that
term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all
U.S. Government end users acquire covered code
with only those rights set forth herein.
115
APPENDIX
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This license represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this
license is held to be unenforceable, such provision
shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to
make it enforceable. This License shall be governed
by California law provisions (except to the extent
applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding
its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an
entity chartered or registered to do business in the
united states of america, any litigation relating to this
License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the
federal courts of the northern district of california,
with venue lying in santa clara county, california, with
the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys'
fees and expenses. The application of the united
nations convention on contracts for the International
sale of goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract
shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply
to this license.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between initial developer and the contributors,
each party is responsible for claims and damages
arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of
rights under this license and you agree to work with
initial developer and contributors to distribute such
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is
intended or shall be deemed to constitute any
admission of liability.
APPENDIX
116
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial developer may designate portions of the covered code as "Multiple-Licensed". "MultipleLicensed" means that the initial developer permits
you to utilize portions of the covered code under your
choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any,
specified by the initial developer in the file described
in exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public
License Version 1.1 (the “license”); you may not use this file
except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a
copy of the license at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the license is distributed on an
"AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is ______________________________________
.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code
is___________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright
(C) _______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under
the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the provisions of [______] license are applicable
instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only under the terms of the [____] license
and not to allow others to use your version of this file under
the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions
above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] license. If you do not delete the
provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file
under either the MPL or the [___] license."
NOTE: The text of this exhibit A may differ slightly from the
text of the notices in the source code files of the original
code. You should use the text of this exhibit A rather than
the text found in the original code/source code for Your
modifications.
OWNER’S MANUAL
LCD TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.
26LD320H
32LD320H
37LD320H
42LD320H
32LD325H
37LD325H
32LD310H
37LD310H
The model and serial number of the TV is located
on the back and one side of the TV.
Record it below should you ever need service.
MODEL
SERIAL
P/NO : SAC34026009 (1103-REV02)
www.lg.com
26LD320H 32LD320H 37LD320H 42LD320H
32LD325H 37LD325H
Lodging Guest Interactive Pro:Centric™ TVs
Commercial Mode Setup Guide
Note: Selected features shown in this guide may not be available on all models.
EXPERIENCED INSTALLER
Commercial Mode Setup
pages 12 – 13
Cloning Information
pages 27 – 32
b-LAN™ Setup & Overview
page 39
© Copyright 2011, LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
P/N: 206-4163 (Rev B)
For Customer Support/Service, please call:­­
1-888-865-3026
The latest product information and documentation is
available online at:
www.LGsolutions.com/products
MODEL and SERIAL NUMBER
The model and serial numbers of this TV are located on the
back of the cabinet. For future reference, LG suggests that
you record those numbers here:
Model No._________________Serial No. _______________
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USERSERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
POWER CORD POLARIZATION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounding-type alternating current power plug. This plug will fit into the power
outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the 3-wire grounding-type plug.
NOTE TO CABLE/TV INSTALLER:
This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the National Electric
Code (U.S.A.). The code provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground
shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of the cable entry as practical.
REGULATORY INFORMATION:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION:
Do not attempt to modify this product in any way without written authorization from LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
Unauthorized modification could void the user’s authority to operate this product.
COMPLIANCE:
The responsible party for this product’s compliance is: LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
1000 Sylvan Avenue, Englewood Cliffs, NJ 07632, USA • Phone: 1-201-816-2000
Marketed and Distributed in the United States by LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
1000 Sylvan Avenue, Englewood Cliffs, NJ 07632
2
© Copyright 2011, LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
206-4163
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Read these instructions.
2.
Keep these instructions.
3.
Heed all warnings.
4.
Follow all instructions.
5.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
6.
Clean only with dry cloth.
7.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8.
Do not install near any heat sources, such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched,
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where it exits from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination in order to avoid injury from
tip-over.
17. Power Cord
Caution: It is recommended that appliances be placed
upon a dedicated circuit; that is, a single outlet circuit
which powers only that appliance and has no additional
outlets or branch circuits. Check the specification page
of the Owner’s Manual to be certain.
Periodically examine the cord of your appliance, and if its
appearance indicates damage or deterioration, unplug it,
discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord replaced
with an exact replacement part by an authorized servicer.
Protect the power cord from physical or mechanical abuse,
such as twisting, kinking, or pinching or being closed in a
door or walked upon. Pay particular attention to plugs, wall
outlets, and the point where the cord exits the appliance.
Do not use a damaged or loose power cord. Be sure to grasp
the plug when unplugging the power cord. Do not pull on the
power cord to unplug the TV.
18. Overloading
Do not connect too many appliances to the same AC power
outlet as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not
overload wall outlets. Overloaded wall outlets, loose or damaged wall outlets, extension cords, frayed power cords, or
damaged or cracked wire insulation are dangerous. Any of
these conditions could result in fire or electric shock.
19. Outdoor Use/Wet Location
Warning: To reduce the risk of fire or electrical
shock, do not expose this product to rain,
moisture or other liquids.
Do not touch the TV with wet hands. Do not install this product near flammable objects such as gasoline or candles or
expose the TV to direct air conditioning.
Do not expose to dripping or splashing and do not place
objects filled with liquids, such as vases, cups, etc., on or over
the apparatus (e.g., on shelves above the unit).
PORTABLE CART WARNING
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
14. Never touch this apparatus or antenna during a thunder or
lighting storm.
15. When mounting a TV on the wall, make sure not to install
the TV by the hanging power and signal cables on the back
of the TV.
16. Do not allow an impact shock or any objects to fall into the
product, and do not drop objects onto the screen.
206-4163
20. Grounding
Ensure that you connect the earth ground wire to prevent
possible electric shock (i.e., a TV with a three-prong grounded AC plug must be connected to a three-prong grounded
AC outlet). If grounding methods are not possible, have a
qualified electrician install a separate circuit breaker. Do not
try to ground the unit by connecting it to telephone wires,
lightening rods, or gas pipes.
21. Disconnect Device
The mains plug is the disconnecting device. The plug must
remain readily operable.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is
not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn
off this unit by SWITCH.
(Continued on next page)
3
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(Continued from previous page)
22. Outdoor Antenna Grounding
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the
product, follow the precautions below.
An outdoor antenna system should not be located in the
vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or
power circuits or where it can come into contact with such
power lines or circuits as death or serious injury can occur.
Be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide
some protection against voltage surges and built-up static
charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) in the
U.S.A. provides information with respect to proper grounding
of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the leadin wire to an antenna-discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
Antenna Grounding According to NEC, ANSI/NFPA 70
Ground Clamp
Antenna Lead in Wire
Antenna Discharge Unit
(NEC Section 810-20)
Electric Service
Equipment
Grounding Conductor
(NEC Section 810-21)
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding
Electrode System (NEC
Art 250, Part H)
27. If you smell smoke or other odors coming from the TV or
hear strange sounds, unplug the power cord, and contact
an authorized service center.
28. Do not press strongly on the panel with a hand or sharp
object (e.g., a nail, pencil, or pen) or make a scratch on it.
29. Keep the product away from direct sunlight.
30. Dot Defect
The Plasma or LCD panel is a high technology product with
resolution of two million to six million pixels. In a very few
cases, you could see fine dots on the screen while you’re
viewing the TV. Those dots are deactivated pixels and do not
affect the performance and reliability of the TV.
31. Generated Sound
“Cracking”: A cracking noise that occurs while the TV is On
or when it is turned Off is generated by plastic thermal contraction due to temperature and humidity. This noise is common for products where thermal deformation is required.
Electrical circuit humming/panel buzzing: A low level noise is
generated from a high-speed switching circuit, which supplies a large amount of current to operate a product. It varies
depending on the product. This generated sound does not
affect the performance and reliability of the product.
32. For LCD TV
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a small “flicker” when it is turned On. This is normal; there is nothing
wrong with TV. Some minute dot defects may be visible on
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue spots.
However, they have no adverse effect on the monitor’s performance. Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time. Doing so may
produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen.
23. Cleaning
When cleaning, unplug the power cord and rub gently with a
soft cloth to prevent scratching. Do not spray water or other
liquids directly on the TV as electric shock may occur. Do not
clean with chemicals such as alcohol, thinners or benzene.
24. Transporting Product
Make sure the product is turned Off and unplugged and that
all cables have been removed. It may take two or more people to carry larger TVs. Do not press against or put stress on
the front panel of the TV.
25. Ventilation
Install the TV where there is proper ventilation. Do not install
in a confined space such as a bookcase. Do not cover the
product with cloth or other materials (e.g., plastic) while it is
plugged in. Do not install in excessively dusty places.
26. Do not touch the ventilation openings, as they may become
hot while the TV is operating.
4
206-4163
Table of Contents
Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 – 4
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Setup Checklist / Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Pro:Centric TV Interactive Menu Features. . . . . . . . . . . 7
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using
a TLL-1100A Clone Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 – 30
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using
an LT2002 Clone Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 – 32
Remote Jack Pack / TV Connections & Setup . . . . . . 33
LD320H/LD325H Rear Jack Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
References
Side Connections Panel / RF Antenna & MPI
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Upgrading TV/PTC Software using a USB Memory
Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Installer Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installer Remote Control Typical Key Functions . . . . . 11
Downloading a Splash Screen using a USB Memory
Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Commercial Mode Setup for Master TV. . . . . . . . . 12 – 13
Power Consumption Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installer Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 – 20
TV Camport Auto Sense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
TV Setup Menus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
TV Aux Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Adding Channel Icons / Custom Channel Labels
(2-5-4 + MENU Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
b-LAN Setup & Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
RJP Model List and Input Auto-sensing Hierarchy. . . . 40
FTG Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 – 26
FTG Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Determining the TV Operating Mode / FTG
Channel Map Configuration Utility Overview . . . . . . 24
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 – 44
General Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility / FTG
Channel Map Editor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Commercial Mode Check / FTG Operating
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
FTG Installer Menu Configuration Utility Overview. . 26
Clone Programmer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Cloning Overview / Clonable Menu Features . . . . . . . 27
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Cloning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 – 32
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using
a USB Memory Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Document Revision History / Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Back Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Notes
• Installer Menu content is intended for use primarily by qualified TV electronics technicians.
• Refer to the Owner’s Manual for additional information on TV features, specifications, maintenance, and safety instructions.
• For additional information, contact your LG representative.
For Customer Support/Service, please call:
1-888-865-3026
www.LGsolutions.com
Note: Design and specifications subject to change without prior notice.
206-4163
5
Setup Checklist / Overview
Setup Checklist
Installation and Setup Checklist
__ Unpack TV and all accessories.
__ Install batteries in remote control.
__ Install TV on VESA mount or stand.
Note: It may be advisable to make all cable
connections before installing on VESA mount or
stand, as appropriate.
Hardware Connections
__ Install any additional hardware as
appropriate to your institution, LAN, etc.
Commercial Mode Setup
__ Complete Commercial Mode Setup (configure
all relevant Installer Menu items as required of
your institution and configure display features
for the end user).
Software Installation
__ Install or configure any software, as applicable,
for example, PPV, etc.
Cable Connections
__ Make all connections to rear jack panel and RF
antenna on MPI/PPV card.
__ Make all connections to signal, interactive
resources, and Aux sources, as appropriate.
Commercial Mode Setup Overview
This document describes how to set up LD320H and LD325H Pro:Centric™ TVs for Commercial Mode
either while in the Embedded b-LAN™ (EBL) module’s Pass-through Mode or its Free-To-Guest (FTG)
Mode.
Note: The b-LAN module is internal to the TV and allows the hotel/institution head end equipment to communicate with the TV for configuration and control. See Reference section, “b-LAN Setup & Overview,” for
further information.
Pass-through Mode
This mode allows you to configure a Master TV Setup for cloning purposes as well as external VOD/PPV
control. Use the Installer Remote to configure Installer Menu items as required for TV operation and set up
TV features (Channel, Picture, Audio, etc.). See pages 12 to 13 for detailed information.
FTG Mode
This mode enables Pro:Idiom® decryption and also allows logical channel mapping of physical channels to
remove the need for dash tuning. FTG Configuration Application software is used to configure and/or edit
Channel Map and Installer Menu settings. See pages 23 to 26 for further information on FTG Mode and local
configuration using a PC with the FTG Configuration Application. Since these TV models are equipped with
the EBL Module, they can also be broadcast configured in FTG Mode by a Free-To-Guest Management
Appliance (FMA) head end device. Refer to the Free-To-Guest (FTG) Configuration Application manual
and/or the Installation & Setup manual for the FMA device.
6
206-4163
Pro:Centric TV Interactive Menu Features
Channel Guide
Information
Remote Help
Watch TV
Important: Pro:Centric operation requires that Installer Menu items 098
PRO:CENTRIC and 119 DATA CHANNEL be set appropriately and that the TV be
in PPV or FTG Mode.
The interactive Pro:Centric TV enables guests—from the comfort of their hotel
rooms—to view and select from a complete listing of hotel services and amenities.
The Pro:Centric TV is connected to the hotel's billing computer, and service/amenities
charges are billed at the time of order.
Interactive amenities may include:
• Hotel information, news, and events
• Directory services (tourist attractions, restaurants, etc.)
• Reservation services (business meetings, fitness, spa, etc.)
• Weather and traffic information
ALARM TIMER
• Shopping services (delivery to guest room)
INPUT
TV
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
INFO
VOL
3
6
9
• Ticketing services
• Check-out service (in the guest room)
• Gaming services
• E-mail resources/account access
FLASHBK
i
PORTAL
CH
MUTE
MENU
• Room service (menu ordering, memo service, morning wake up call, laundry, etc.)
GUIDE
CC
P
A
G
E
Use the Installer Remote to operate both interactive menus and regular TV features.
Press PORTAL on the Installer Remote to access the interactive menus.
Note: Interactive menu options may vary, depending on Pro:Centric features enabled
for the site. The following are default interactive menus.
Channel Guide
ENTER
RETURN
SAP
Shows available TV networks and channels. When available, Electronic Program
Guide (EPG) data indicates the channel and the program start and finish times.
EXIT
EJECT
RATIO
Information
Typically displays hotel information, for example, photos of guest rooms, dining rooms,
business centers, fitness and pool facilities, etc. Information may also include resources, such as local school programs, run in cooperation with the hotel.
Remote Help
Provides help for navigating the interactive menus.
Watch TV
Removes the interactive menu from the screen and returns to the previously tuned TV
channel.
206-4163
7
LD320H/LD325H Rear Jack Panel
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
Audio connection for
RGB or DVI device.
RJP
Connection for Remote Jack
Pack (RJP) Control cable.
REMOTE CONTROL OUT
IR output for controlling an
auxiliary device.
UPDATE
Restricted to
software updates.
RESET
Press RESET to
re-initialize the TV.
AUDIO/VIDEO IN 1
Connection for composite audio/
video output from external device.
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET
HDMI
HDMI
/DVI IN
2
1
UPDATE
.....
....
RJP
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
..........
..........
.....
.....
.....
AV IN 1
VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
GAME
CONTROL
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
ANTENNA IN
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
TV-LINK
CFG
ANTENNA IN
26LD320H only.
Connect to Antenna/
CATV.
RS-232C IN
Use for downloading
software updates, etc.
TV-LINK CFG
Use for local FTG
configuration.
R
COMPONENT IN
HDMI/DVI IN
Connection for HDMI/DVI
output from external device.
RGB IN (PC)
Connection for RGB
output from PC.
COMPONENT IN
Connection for component
output from external device.
GAME CONTROL *
EBL in LodgeNet PPV Mode only.
SPEAKER OUT (8Ω) **
Connect to 8 ohm self-powered
speaker input. Intended for special
applications, such as a powered bathroom speaker with volume control.
* For 26LD320H TVs, this is a GAME CONTROL/MPI port. GAME CONTROL function as described
above. When the EBL is in Pass-through Mode, the MPI function enables an external MPI control device
(i.e., clone programmer, VOD/PPV STB, etc.) to control the TV.
** This stereo jack provides a mono speaker fixed-level, 1 watt output (audio +, audio -, w/ground shield).
Do NOT plug in a mono connector, as this may damage the TV.
8
206-4163
Side Connections Panel / RF Antenna & MPI Connections
A/V 2 Input
L/MONO-AUDIO-R IN
Connect to audio output jacks
on external device. For only
mono audio output, connect to
Left audio input.
VIDEO L/MONO -AUDIO- R
USB IN
Insert USB memory device for
software updates, cloning purposes, or picture/music entertainment, as applicable.
USB IN
Side Connections Panel
VIDEO IN
Connect to video output port on
external device (see Reference
section, “TV Camport Auto Sense
Operation,” for further information).
AV IN 2
RF Antenna & MPI Connections
(32/37/42LD320H and 32/37LD325H TVs)
Note: 26LD320H Antenna
and MPI connections are
on the rear jack panel (see
previous page).
Antenna
or CATV
ANTENNA IN
MP I
206-4163
ANTENNA IN
Connect to
Antenna/CATV.
MPI
Enables an external MPI control
device (i.e., clone programmer, VOD/
PPV STB, etc.) to control the TV when
the EBL is in Pass-through Mode.
9
Installer Overview
This is the Commercial Mode Setup Guide only.
Installer Menu / Commercial Mode Setup
XXLD320H PTC INSTALLER MENU
To set up a Master TV, you will need to know how to enter the TV
Installer Menu and make changes to the default values as required.
Similarly, to configure a single TV’s Installer Menu settings in FTG Mode,
you will need to know how to access and use the FTG Configuration
Application utilities. If necessary, familiarize yourself with the Installer
Menu and how to make and save changes. Refer to page 14 for information on accessing the Installer Menu in Pass-through Mode. Refer to
page 23 for information on accessing the FTG Installer Menu
Configuration Utility in the FTG Configuration Application. Pages 15 to 20
describe Installer Menu items in detail.
000
INSTALLER SEQ
000
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.000
FPGA E0F1
CPU V3.06.00
Typical Installer Menu
Installer Remote
The LG Installer Remote is supplied with and dedicated to operate the
TV. See next page for typical key functions in TV operating mode. Some
DVD and VCR controls may be available for selected LG DVD/VCR
products.
Cloning
Cloning refers to the process of capturing a Master TV Setup and transferring it to a Target TV. The Master TV’s clonable features need to be
configured as part of the Commercial Mode Setup. This is a critical step.
If the Master TV’s clonable features—channel icons or labels, digital font
options, etc.—are not set up correctly, the cloned TVs will all have problems. Pages 27 to 32 provide detailed information on cloning requirements and procedures.
ALARM TIMER
INPUT
TV
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
INFO
3
6
9
FLASHBK
i
VOL
PORTAL
MENU
GUIDE
CH
P
A
G
E
MUTE
CC
ENTER
+
A
AA
A
AA
+
Installing Batteries in Installer
Remote
• Open the battery compartment cover on the back side of the remote.
• Install two high-quality alkaline 1.5V AAA batteries. Never mix old
or used batteries with new ones. Install batteries matching correct
polarity as shown (+ with + and - with -).
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
10
RETURN
SAP
EXIT
EJECT
RATIO
206-4163
Installer Remote Control Typical Key Functions
The LG Installer Remote illustrated below and throughout this document shows typical remote control functions and
is provided for reference only. This Installer Remote may vary from the Installer Remote supplied with the TV.
POWER
Turns TV On or Off.
ALARM
Sets the time when the TV
will automatically turn itself ON.
TIMER
Sets the amount of time before the TV
automatically turns itself OFF.
INPUT
Selects RGB, HDMI/DVI1, HDMI2,
Component Input, AV1, and AV2 sources.
TV
Returns to the last TV channel.
ALARM TIMER
PORTAL
Displays and removes the interactive
menu.
MUTE
Switches sound ON or OFF.
NUMBER Buttons (0 - 9) DASH
Use to enter a program number or channel.
Dash is used for sub-channel numbers such
as 2-1, 2-2, 9-1, 9-2, 100-3, 100-4, etc.
TV
1
4
7
VOLUME UP/DOWN
Increases/decreases sound level.
INFO
Displays channel information.
INPUT
2
5
8
0
INFO
VOL
3
6
9
FLASHBK (FLASHBACK)
Returns to the previously tuned channel.
Arrows (Up/Down/Left/Right) & ENTER
Use to navigate on-screen menus and
adjust TV settings to your requirements.
MENU
Provides access to the TV setup menus on
the screen. Also, enters or exits the onscreen menu system.
FLASHBK
i
PORTAL
CH
GUIDE
Displays and removes the electronic
program guide.
P
A
G
E
MUTE
MENU
CHANNEL UP/DOWN
Selects available channels found with
Auto Tuning. Moves to next available
page in electronic program guide.
GUIDE
CC
Press to activate subtitles.
CC
RETURN
Returns one level to the previous menu/
display.
ENTER
RETURN
SAP
SAP
Analog Mode: Selects MTS sound (Mono,
Stereo, or SAP). DTV Mode: Changes
audio language, if additional languages are
available. *
EXIT
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to
TV viewing.
Color buttons access special functions
in some menus.
VCR/DVD BUTTONS
Controls some video cassette
recorders or DVD players.
EJECT
Ejects a USB memory device, CD,
DVD, VHS tape, as applicable.
RATIO
Adjusts the picture aspect ratio.
EJECT
RATIO
* SAP notes:
•
•
•
206-4163
If SAP is selected and no SAP is provided, sound
may not be heard on channel.
Each analog channel may have its own SAP setting.
Digital channels will reset to default audio language
with a power off/on.
11
Commercial Mode Setup for Master TV
This section describes how to set up a Master TV when the EBL is in Pass-through Mode.
Note: Disconnect all Aux inputs. Under certain conditions, Auto Tuning (Channel Search) is disabled if
there is an Aux input active.
Note: Refer to “FTG Mode of Operation” on pages 23 to 26 for information on configuring/editing
Channel Map and Installer Menu settings for an individual TV in FTG Mode.
1. Set Installer Menu items.
a) Use the Installer Remote to enter the TV Installer Menu: Press
MENU repeatedly until the on-screen menu locks up, and then
press 9-8-7-6 + ENTER. Refer to pages 14 to 20 for detailed
information on Installer Menu items.
b) Set Installer Menu item 117 FACT DEFAULT to 001 and press
ENTER on the Installer Remote.
This clears all Installer Menu custom settings, channel labels/
icons, etc. and reloads the factory default settings. The value
will change back to 0 after the internal TV controller (Protocol
Translator Card [PTC]) has been restored to factory default
condition. This step ensures that the TV Channel Memory will
be the active Channel List.
c) Set Installer Menu item 003 BAND/AFC, as appropriate.
• Broadcast: Set to 000.
• CATV: Set to 001 (default).
• HRC: Set to 002.
• IRC: Set to 003.
XXLD320H PTC INSTALLER MENU
000
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.000
2. Set up TV features.
On-screen setup menus control the features of the TV (see page
21). Press MENU on the Installer Remote to access the setup
menus, and then set Channel, Picture, Audio, Lock, Time, etc.
options to the desired configurations. See also the Clonable Menu
Features list on page 27.
Note: If desired, you can run Auto Tuning (see step 3) prior to
completing this step.
000
FPGA E0F1
CPU V3.06.00
Typical TV Installer Menu
Note: The Installer Menu header will vary
depending on the TV you are setting up.
117
FACT DEFAULT
001
003
BAND/AFC
00X
Adjust the settings for these
Installer Menu items.
d) Set any other Installer Menu items that affect your TV programming network to the required configuration. For example, enable/disable Aux sources, set a Start Channel, etc.
e) After you have adjusted all required Installer Menu item settings, press ENTER on the Installer Remote to exit the menu
and save your changes.
INSTALLER SEQ
CHANNEL
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
OPTION
INPUT
MY MEDIA
Set the TV features to the desired
configuration for the end user.
(Continued on next page)
12
206-4163
Commercial Mode Setup for Master TV (Cont.)
(Continued from previous page)
3. Run Auto Tuning (Channel Search).
a) Search for all available analog and digital channels: Go to the
Channel Menu, select the Auto Tuning option, and follow the
on-screen instructions.
b) Use the Channel Edit option in the Channel Menu to edit the
channel lineup, as necessary, to include free to guest channels
only.
• Add/delete channels per your system requirements. Note that
physical channel numbers are used to identify virtual channels.
Also, channel numbers cannot be higher than 255.
• Use the Channel Label option in the Channel Menu to add
familiar channel trademarks/logos such as ABC, CBS, NBC,
etc. to the Channel-Time on-screen display. Identifiable labels
(logos) should enable the end user to readily know what common networks are available. (You can add the channel labels
in this step, or you can add channel logos or labels for channels
without icons in step 5.)
4. Transfer the TV Setup to the internal TV Controller (PTC):
2-5-5 + MENU Mode
After the TV channel lineup has been edited and channel label icons
added, enter the Installer Menu. Once in the Installer Menu, press
2-5-5 + MENU on the Installer Remote to initiate the transfer of the
Master TV Setup to the PTC. Once the transfer is complete, the TV
will exit the Installer Menu.
CHANNEL
Move
Enter
‡$XWR7XQLQJ
‡0DQXDO7XQLQJ
‡&KDQQHO(GLW
‡&KDQQHO/DEHO
Run Auto Tuning, edit channels, and select
familiar channel trademarks/logos using
Channel Menu options.
DIGITAL 19-3
MONO STEREO
SAP
WXYZ
Custom Text Label “WXYZ” created in
2-5-4 + MENU (Add Channel Label) Mode.
Note: The maximum number of active channels that can be transferred is 141. Total channels numbering more than 141 will result in
erratic TV operation.
5. Add Custom Channel and Aux Source Labels for Analog
Channels: 2-5-4 + MENU Mode
Enter the Installer Menu, and press 2-5-4 + MENU on the Installer
Remote. Add/edit custom text labels to channel on-screen displays.
Note that digital channels often have a broadcaster generated label
(see 2-5-4 + MENU procedural information on page 22). When you
are finished, press MENU to exit 2-5-4 + MENU Mode.
6. Verify the TV setup.
At this point, verify that the channel lineup, channel icons, and custom labels are correct. Make sure the TV features are set per your
requirements.
028
CH. OVERIDE
000
After verifying the TV Setup, set Installer
Menu item 028 CH. OVERIDE to 000.*
* This step prevents end users from
accessing channel settings (i.e., the
Channel Menu will be inaccessible/
grayed out).
7. Lock the channel lineup.
Enter the Installer Menu, and set item 028 CH. OVERIDE to 000 to
lock the channel lineup and restrict access to the TV setup menus.*
Press ENTER to exit the Installer Menu and save your changes.
The Master TV Setup is now ready to be copied to a clone programmer
(see cloning information in this document).
206-4163
13
Installer Menu
Use the Installer Menu to set up or change operational settings.
Refer to the table starting on the next page for brief descriptions of Installer Menu
items. More detailed descriptions follow the table listing.
Accessing the Installer Menu
Make sure the TV is ON. Using an Installer Remote, press MENU repeatedly
until the on-screen setup menus lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 + ENTER to
access the Installer Menu.
The Installer Menu opens with item 000 INSTALLER SEQ 000. Use the Up/
Down arrow keys to sequence through the available menu items, or access
an item directly by keying in the line number and then pressing MENU. For
example, to access the SLEEP TIMER option, which is item 015, press 0-1-5
+ MENU. To change a setting, use the Left/Right arrow keys, or enter a value
directly.
Using the Installer Menu
XXLD320H PTC INSTALLER MENU
000
INSTALLER SEQ
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.000
000
FPGA E0F1
CPU V3.06.00
Typical TV Installer Menu
Items 000 ~ 119 are immediately accessible only upon entering the Installer
Menu. Refer to the table on pages 15 and 16 for an overview of Installer
Menu items, including item numbers, functions, ranges, and default values.
Installer Menu items not relevant to these TV series are not present on the
Installer Menu; therefore, some numbers are missing. For example, item 006
will not appear.
Exiting the Installer Menu and Activating Updates
To exit the Installer Menu, press ENTER again. Any changes you make will
be stored in non-volatile memory.
14
206-4163
Installer Menu (Cont.)
Installer Menu Items 000 through 071
Menu
Item
Function
Value Range
Default Value
Brief Description of Function and Comments
000
INSTALLER SEQ
0~3
0
Leave default set to 0.
001
POWER MANAGE
0~7
0
Sets number of hours of no activity before automatic shutoff.
002
AC ON
0/1
0
Set to 1 to enable Auto Turn ON when AC power is applied.
003
BAND/AFC
0~3
1
Selects Tuning Band: 0=Broadcast, 1=CATV, 2=HRC, 3=IRC
0 ~ 127, 255
255
Channel tuned when TV is turned ON. (Set to 255 to tune to channel
tuned before TV turned OFF.)
0/1
0
If set to 1, cannot tune from current channel.
0 ~ 63, 255
255
Volume level when TV is turned ON. (Set to 255 to use volume level
before TV turned OFF.)
004
STRT CHANNEL
005
CHAN LOCK
007
STRT VOLUME
008
MIN VOLUME
0 ~ 63
0
Sets minimum allowable volume setting.
009
MAX VOLUME
0 ~ 63
63
Sets maximum allowable volume setting.
010
MUTE DISABLE
0/1
0
Set to 1 to disable Mute Function.
011
KEY DEFEAT
0/1
0
Set to 1 to disable menu navigation keys on display panel.
015
SLEEP TIMER
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable Sleep Timer.
016
EN TIMER
0/1
0
Set to 1 to enable On/Off Timers.
017
ALARM
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable Alarm.
020
FEATURE LEVEL
0 ~ 1, 16 ~ 24
1
Determines the IR code scheme to which the TV will respond.
021
V-CHIP
022
MAX BLK HRS
023
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable V-Chip (Parental Control) functions.
0 ~ 99
12
Sets number of V-Chip blocking hours.
CAPTION LOCK
0/1
0
Set to 1 to retain caption setting set before TV turned OFF.
028
CH. OVERIDE
0/1
1
If set to 0, limits direct access to favorite channels.
029
OLD OCV
0/1
0
Set to 1 to change MPI operation to OCV.
030
ACK MASK
0/1
0
If set to 1, changes MPI for some OCV boxes.
031
POLL RATE
20 ~ 169
94
Selects poll rate for MPI.
032
TIMING PULSE
186 ~ 227
207
Sets baud rate for MPI.
034
CAMPORT EN
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable Video 2 input.
035
COMPPORT EN.
0/1
1
Set to 0 to disable HDMI 1. Set to 1 enable HDMI 1.
038
YPrPb EN.
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable display panel Component Video 1 input jacks.
039
REAR AUX EN
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable display panel Video 1 input jack.
040
AUTO CAMPORT
0/1
1
Set to 1 to automatically switch to Camport. If set to 1, STRT AUX SRCE
cannot be set to 2.
046
STRT AUX SRCE
1 ~ 6, 255
6
Sets the starting Aux source (if item 004 STRT CHANNEL is set to 0).
047
AUX STATUS
0/1
0
Set to 1 for MPI Aux source to be reported as a channel number instead of
Channel 0.
053
DIS. CH-TIME
0/1
0
Set to 1 to disable Channel-Time display.
069
EN. CH-T COL.
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable custom color for the Channel-Time display.
070
FOR. CH-TIME
0~7
2
Chooses custom foreground color for the Channel-Time display.
071
BCK. CH-TIME
0~7
2
Chooses custom background color for the Channel-Time display.
206-4163
15
Installer Menu (Cont.)
Installer Menu Items 073 through 119
Menu
Item
16
Function
Value Range
Default Value
Brief Description of Function and Comments
073
CH NOT AVBLE
0/1
0
If set to 1 and Channel Override is 0, “NOT AVAILABLE” message is displayed
when directly accessing a channel not in the favorite Channel List.
075
REVERT CH
0/1
0
If set to 1 and loss of MPI communication occurs, TV tunes to Start Channel.
078
UPN MSB
0 ~ 255
0
User programmable number, most significant byte.
079
UPN MSB-1
0 ~ 255
0
User programmable number, most significant byte - 1.
080
UPN MSB-2
0 ~ 255
0
User programmable number, most significant byte - 2.
081
UPN LSB
0 ~ 255
0
User programmable number, least significant byte.
082
CHKSM ERROR
0/1
1
Enforces rigid MPI checksum.
083
HANDSHK TIME
0~5
5
Relaxes MPI timing to be compatible with PC-based Windowscontrolled systems.
084
PERMANENT BLK
0/1
0
Removes block hours setting for Parental Control and makes block permanent.
087
REAR RGB EN.
0 / 1 / 17
1
Dependent on item 093 RJP AVAILABLE setting. Set to 0 to disable RGB1.
Set to 1 to enable for RGB PC. Set to 17 for Auto Configure.
088
EN NOISE MUTE
0/1
1
If set to 1, audio is muted if no signal is present.
090
KEY LOCK
0/1
0
If set to 1, keyboard is locked out, IR is still functional.
091
YPrPb2 EN
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable HDMI 2 input.
093
RJP AVAILABLE
0, 1, 2, 5, 6
0
Set to 0 to disable. Set to 1, 2, 5, or 6 for HDMI or DVI Mode. (See
detailed descriptions.)
094
SAP MENU EN
0/1
1
Set to 0 to disable feature on Function Menu. Set to 1 to enable feature on
Function Menu.
096
DEF. ASP. RATIO
0~4
2
Sets default aspect ratio at power up. See detailed descriptions and item 106.
098
PRO:CENTRIC
0~2
0
Set to 0 to disable Pro:Centric operation. Set to 1 for Flash Mode. Set to 2 for
GEM (Java Application) Mode.
099
BACK LIGHTING
1 ~ 100,
101 ~ 200, 255
100
Sets the level of the TV picture back lighting. (See detailed descriptions.)
102
ATSC BAND
0~4
4
Selects ATSC band.
103
ATSC TUNE MODE
0/1
1
Set to 1 (default) for Physical Channel scan. Set to 0 for Virtual Channel scan.
104
START MINOR CH
0 ~ 255
0
Selects Minor Start Channel. Set to 0 for NTSC.
106
ASP RATIO LOCK
0/1
0
To retain set aspect ratio on power cycle, set to 1. Set to 0 for default ratio on
power cycle.
116
VIDEO MUTE EN
0/1
0
Set to 0 for Normal. Set to 1 for Blank.
117
FACT DEFAULT
0/1
0
Set to 0 for Normal. Set to 1 to load presets for all Installer Menu settings.
118
POWER SAVINGS
1/3/7
3
If set to 1, the b-LAN module is always powered. If set to 3, the b-LAN module
is only powered when TV is turned ON. If set to 7, the b-LAN module is never
powered.
119
DATA CHANNEL
0 ~ 135
0
Set to 0 to disable. Set to the RF channel number of the Data Channel for
Pro:Centric or E-Z Installation data. (See detailed descriptions.)
206-4163
Installer Menu (Cont.)
Detailed Descriptions of Installer Menu Items
000 - INSTALLER SEQUENCE
Specifies entry sequence to the Installer Menu.
0 = 9876
2 = 1478
To translate a TV volume level to the Installer Menu value, use
the following formula:
1 = 4321
3 = 3698
001 - POWER MANAGE (Power Management)
Determines hours of no activity before automatic shutoff. The
Power Management function is for saving energy. If set to 0,
Power Manage is Off. Settings range from 0 ~ 7, with 1 ~ 7 representing the hours that the unit will remain ON, unless there has
been activity from either the control panel or remote control.
002 - AC ON (AC Power Switchable)
If set to 1, this allows the TV to turn ON when AC power is applied. Pressing the ON button is not necessary. This is desirable
if the TV is plugged into a cable box or a power outlet controlled
by a wall switch. Use the Left/Right arrow keys to choose 0 or 1,
where 0 is the default (OFF), and 1 is ON.
Note: If set to 1 (ON), the TV does not respond to On/Off commands from either the remote or the display control panel, and the
SLEEP TIMER is also nonfunctional.
003 - BAND/AFC (Band/Automatic Frequency Control)
There are four possible settings for this option:
0 = Broadcast
2 = HRC
NOTE: For items 007, 008, and 009
For legacy reasons, the scale used is 0 – 63. The PTC software
will translate this to the 0 – 100 scale used by the TV.
1 = CATV (default)
3 = IRC
If some channels were not found by Auto Tuning (Channel
Search), select the appropriate Band setting here, and add the
channels using the Channel Edit option in the Channel Menu.
Installer Value = TV Value x 63
100
Enter only the whole number (disregard fractions).
007 - STRT VOLUME (Start Volume)
This function allows the Installer to determine the initial volume
level setting when the TV is turned ON. This feature is useful
for an in-house information channel, since the TV would always
select that volume level when it is turned ON. The range of values
are 0 - 63, 255. If 255 is selected, the current volume level will be
retained in memory when the TV is turned OFF; at turn ON, the
volume level will be automatically set at the previous or last level.
008 - MIN VOLUME (Minimum Volume)
This function determines the minimum volume level allowable
with the Volume (VOL) Up/Down control. In this way, for example,
someone cannot set the volume too low to hear. The value range
is from 0 to 63. Use the Left/Right arrow keys to change values.
The factory default is 0, which provides the full range of volume
control, if item 009 MAX VOLUME is also set to 63. It may be best
to set the same value on every TV.
Note: The minimum volume level cannot have a value setting
higher than the maximum volume level (described below).
004 - STRT CHANNEL (Start Channel)
If active, this function allows you to determine the initial Major
Start Channel number when the TV is turned ON. This feature is
useful for an in-house information channel, since the TV would always select that channel when it is turned ON. Setting this item to
255 causes the last channel viewed when the TV was turned OFF,
to be the tuned to channel when the TV is turned ON again.
009 - MAX VOLUME (Maximum Volume)
This function determines the maximum volume level allowable
with the Volume (VOL) Up/Down control. In this way, for example,
someone cannot set the volume level high enough to disturb others. The value range is 0 to 63, with 63 as the default, which gives
the user the full range of volume control, if item 008 MIN VOLUME
is also set at 0. Use the Left/Right arrow keys to change values. It
may be best to set the same value on every TV.
Note: For a digital Start Channel, always remember to set item
104 to the Minor Start Channel number.
Note: The maximum volume level cannot have a value setting
lower than the minimum volume level (described above).
255 = Last channel
126 = Map to Channel 3
010 - MUTE DISABLE
Enables or disables sound mute function. If set to 1, sound cannot
be muted. If set to 0, sound can be muted.
1 ~ 125 = Major Ch. #
127 = Map to Channel 4
0 = Aux
005 - CHAN LOCK (Channel Lock)
Channel Lock is ideal if the system must always be on the same
channel. Changing channels with the Channel Up/Down or keypad numbers is impossible. Channel Lock is inactive if set to 0
(default).
Generally, this feature is used in connection with STRT CHANNEL (Installer Menu item 004) where the Start Channel may, for
example, be set to 3 or 4. If the Start Channel is 3, then the TV
will remain locked on channel 3.
206-4163
011 - KEY DEFEAT (Keyboard Defeat)
If set to 1, KEY DEFEAT prevents the end user from accessing
the on-screen menus from the display panel—MENU, ENTER,
and menu navigation keys do not function. If set to 0, those keys
do function.
Note: Users can always access the menus by pressing MENU on
the remote.
17
Installer Menu (Cont.)
015 - SLEEP TIMER
If set to 1, the Sleep Timer feature may be used. If set to 0, the
Sleep Timer is not available.
016 - EN TIMER (Enable On/Off Timers) *
If set to 1, the Timer function is available to the end user and
enabled continuously. Set to 0 to disable On/Off timers.
Note: Clock must be set in order to use timers.
017 - ALARM *
Gives the installer the option of making the Alarm
function available to the end user. If set to 1, the Alarm
function is available to the end user. Set to 0 to disable
the Alarm function.
Note: Clock must be set before the Alarm function will work.
020 - FEATURE LEVEL
Determines the IR code scheme to which the TV will respond,
allowing for the use of unique IR codes based on “bed number” in
a multi-TV single room installation. First determine the IR mode;
then select the bed number.
030 - ACK MASK
MPI Communication Parameter. Leave at default setting unless
changed by PPV provider. When set to 1, changes MPI for some
OCV boxes.
031 - POLL RATE
MPI Communication Parameter. Selects Poll Rate for MPI. Leave
at default setting unless changed by Pay-Per-View provider. Step
size of 16 ms.
032 - TIMING PULSE
MPI Communication Parameter. Leave at default setting unless
changed by Pay-Per-View provider. Sets baud rate. Step size of
4.3 uS.
034 - CAMPORT EN. (Camera Port Enable)
Set to 1 to enable Video 2 input on display panel. If set to 0, Video
2 input on display panel is not functional.
035 - COMPPORT EN. (Computer Port Enable)
Enable/disable TV display panel HDMI 1 input jack. Set to 0 to
disable HDMI1. Set to 1 to enable HDMI1.
IR Mode 0 = Legacy
IR Mode 1 = Multi-code remote
Note: This setting is ignored if item 093 RJP AVAILABLE is set to 1.
Note: For further information, see documentation for the accessory
package that includes the multi-code remote.
038 - YPrPb EN. (Rear Component Video Enable)
Set to 1 to enable display panel rear Component Video input jacks.
Set to 0 to disable display panel rear Component Video input jacks.
021 - V-CHIP (Parental Control) *
Set to 1 to activate V-Chip (Parental Control) and have it available
to the end user to filter and control or otherwise restrict programming content that can appear. Set to 0 to turn the V-Chip feature
Off (not available to user); no programming restrictions can be set.
039 - REAR AUX EN. (Rear Aux Enable)
Set to 1 to enable display panel rear Aux (Video 1) input. Set to 0
to disable display panel rear Aux (Video 1) input.
022 - MAX BLK HRS (Maximum Block Hours) *
Sets hours from 0 to 99 for the maximum V-Chip (Parental Control)
block hours. Default setting is for 12 blocking hours.
040 - AUTO CAMPORT
Set to 1 to automatically switch to Camport when equipment is
connected to front Video input. Set to 0 to disable front Video
automatic source selection.
023 - CAPTION LOCK
If set to 0, captions are OFF when the TV is turned ON. Set to 1 to
use the caption setting configured before the TV was turned OFF
when the TV is turned ON.
046 - STRT AUX SRCE (Start Aux Source)
Sets the starting Aux source. When turned ON, the TV will tune to
starting Aux source if item 004 STRT CHANNEL is set to 0.
028 - CH. OVERIDE (Channel Override)
If set to 1, the user can select channels with either Channel Up/
Down or by direct keypad entry. If set to 0, only those channels
that are active in the TV’s memory can be selected.
If item 093 RJP AVAILABLE is set to 0 and item 040 AUTO
CAMPORT is set to 0:
1 = Video 1
4 = RGB
255 = Last Aux
2 = Video 2
5 = HDMI 2
3 = HDMI 1
6 = Component
029 - OLD OCV (On Command Video™)
Set to 1 for operation with systems from On Command Corporation.
If item 093 RJP AVAILABLE is set to 1:
2 = Video 2
5 = HDMI 2
6 = Component
* Only affects Function Menu if enabled by some PPV providers.
If item 040 AUTO CAMPORT is set to 1:
1 = Video 1
4 = RGB
6 = Component
3 = HDMI 1
5 = HDMI 2
18
Note: If set to 1, item 093 RJP AVAILABLE is automatically set to 0.
206-4163
Installer Menu (Cont.)
047 - AUX STATUS
Set to 1 for MPI Aux source to be reported as a channel number
instead of channel 0. Set to 0 to disable Aux identification change.
Controls MPI status channel response for Aux inputs.
082 - CHKSM ERROR (Checksum Error)
Enforces rigid MPI checksum validation. Set to 1 for validation.
Set to 0 to disable (does not check checksum on MPI async port).
SPI is always checked.
053 - DIS. CH-TIME (Disable Channel-Time)
Set to 1 to disable the Channel-Time display; Channel-Time display will not appear. Set to 0 to enable the Channel-Time display.
083 - HANDSHK TIME (Handshake Time)
Adds an additional delay to the handshake time which is 64 msec,
thus relaxing MPI timing requirements to be compatible with PCbased Windows controlled systems. Range is 0 - 5.
(Timeout = 25.5MS + [25.5 MS* Handshake time].)
069 - EN. CH-T COL. (Enable Channel-Time Custom Color)
Set to 1 to enable custom color for the Channel-Time display. Set
to 0 to disable custom color for the Channel-Time display.
070 - FOR. CH-TIME (Channel-Time Display Foreground Color)
Set according to Color Chart:
0 = Black
3 = Cyan
6 = Yellow
1 = Blue
4 = Red
7 = White
2 = Green
5 = Violet
Note: Applies only to “Channel Not Available” message if item
073 is set to 1 (enabled). If foreground color and background
color are the same, the menu background will be transparent.
071 - BCK. CH-TIME (Channel-Time Display Background Color)
Set according to Color Chart:
0 = Black
3 = Cyan
6 = Yellow
1 = Blue
4 = Red
7 = White
2 = Green
5 = Violet
084 - PERMANENT BLK (Permanent Block)
Allows Lock (Parental Control) blocking schemes to be permanent
by disabling the blocking hours function. Set to 1 to install Parental Control restrictions permanently. Set to 0 for user-specified
hours control of blocking schemes.
087 - REAR RGB EN. (Rear RGB Enable)
Controls access to rear RGB input on TV. Set to 0 to disable RGB
input. Set to 1 to enable for PC RGB input. Set to 17 to initiate a
one-time automatic configuration after an AC power cycle; otherwise, automatic adjustment will be performed each time the RGB
input is accessed.
088 - EN NOISE MUTE (Enable Noise Mute)
If set to 1, audio mutes if no signal is present.
Note: Applies only to “Channel Not Available” message if item
073 is set to 1 (enabled). If foreground color and background
color are the same, the menu background will be transparent.
090 - KEY LOCK
If set to 1, front keyboard Channel, Volume, and Captions buttons
are disabled, Power button remains enabled. If set to 0, the Channel, Volume, Captions, and Power buttons are all enabled.
073 - CH NOT AVBLE (Channel Not Available)
If set to 1 and item 028 CH. OVERIDE is set to 0, a “NOT AVAILABLE” message is displayed when directly accessing a channel
not in the channel scan list available in memory.
091 - YPrPb2 EN. (HDMI2 Enable)
Set to 0 to disable display panel HDMI2 input. Set to 1 to enable
DTV mode. Set to 2 to enable PC mode.
075 - REVERT CH (Revert to Start Channel)
If set to 1 and loss of MPI communication occurs, TV automatically tunes to the specified Start Channel.
078 - UPN MSB (UPN Most Significant Byte)
User programmable number, most significant byte readable by
MPI command. Not linked to serial number.
079 - UPN MSB-1 (UPN Most Significant Byte-1)
User programmable number, most significant byte-1 readable by
MPI command. Not linked to serial number.
080 - UPN MSB-2 (UPN Most Significant Byte-2)
User programmable number, most significant byte-2 readable by
MPI command. Note: Not linked to serial number.
081 - UPN LSB (UPN Least Significant Byte)
User programmable number, least significant byte readable by
MPI command. Note: Not linked to serial number.
206-4163
093 - RJP AVAILABLE (Remote Jack Pack Available)
• 0 = Remote jack pack is not available or disabled.
• 1 = Legacy Model RJPs: HDMI Mode
Enables RJP feature for use with full cable bundle models. In
this mode, when an HDMI source is connected to the RJP, both
digital video and audio are expected via the HDMI cable. If no
digital audio is present, no audio will be heard.
• 2 = Legacy Model RJPs: DVI Mode
Enables RJP feature for use with full cable bundle models. In
this mode, when an HDMI/DVI source is connected to the RJP,
only digital video is expected via the HDMI cable. Analog audio
is provided via a separate cable, from the source, connected to
an RJP AUDIO IN. If no analog audio cable is connected, tuner
audio will be heard.
• 5 = Scaler Model RJPs: HDMI Mode
Enables RJP feature for use with reduced cable bundle models.
In this mode, when an HDMI source is connected to the RJP,
both digital video and audio are expected via the HDMI cable. If
no digital audio is present, no audio will be heard.
19
Installer Menu (Cont.)
• 6 = Scaler Model RJPs: DVI Mode
Enables RJP feature for use with reduced cable bundle models.
In this mode, when an HDMI/DVI source is connected to the
RJP, only digital video is expected via the HDMI cable. Analog
audio is provided via separate cable, from the source, connected to an RJP AUDIO IN. If no analog audio cable is connected,
tuner audio will be heard.
Notes:
See Reference section, “RJP Model List and Input Auto-sensing
Hierarchy.” If RJP AVAILABLE is set to 1, 2, 5, or 6, item 040
AUTO CAMPORT is automatically set to 0. Settings 1, 2, 5, and 6
allow the lodge staff to customize each TV’s RJP setup based on
customer requirements.
094 - SAP MENU EN (2nd Audio Program)
Set to 1 to enable SAP feature on Function Menu, if Function
Menu is available. Set to 0 to disable SAP feature on Function
Menu, if Function Menu is available.
096 - DEF. ASP. RATIO (Default Aspect Ratio)
Selects default aspect ratio at power up.
•
•
•
•
•
Set to 0 for Set By System.
Set to 1 for 4:3.
Set to 2 for 16:9 (Factory Default).
Set to 3 for Just Scan.
Set to 4 for Zoom.
Note: Only applies if item 106 ASP RATIO LOCK is disabled, set
to 0.
098 - PRO:CENTRIC
Selects the Pro:Centric Mode. Set to 0 (default) to disable
Pro:Centric operation. Set to 1 for Flash Mode. Set to 2 for GEM
(Java Application) Mode.
099 - BACK LIGHTING
Sets the TV screen brightness at power up. Default setting is 100.
• 1 - 100 Static Back Lighting
(1 = Dimmest picture, 100 = Brightest picture)
• 101 - 200 Dynamic Back Lighting
(101 = Dimmest picture, 200 = Brightest picture)
If set between 101 and 200, the TV automatically controls back
lighting depending upon the picture level of the current program. If
set to 255, back lighting is controlled via the Picture settings in the
TV’s setup menus.
102 - ATSC BAND
Sets up TV to receive different types of incoming signals:
0 = Broadcast, 1 = CATV, 2 = HRC, 3 = IRC, 4 = Same as NTSC.
103 - ATSC TUNE MODE
Sets ATSC tuning mode: Default set to 1 for Physical Channel
scan. Set to 0 for Virtual Channel scan.
20
104 - START MINOR CHANNEL
Sets Minor Start Channel number at power up. 0 = NTSC. If not
0, number selected is the digital channel’s Minor Start Channel
number.
106 - ASP RATIO LOCK (Aspect Ratio Lock)
Set to 1 to retain previous aspect ratio with power off. Set to 0 to
retain default aspect ratio with power off. See item 096 DEF. ASP.
RATIO above.
116 - VIDEO MUTE EN (Video Mute Enable)
Set to 0 for Normal. Set to 1 for Blank.
117 - FACT DEFAULT (Factory Default)
Set to 0 for normal. Set to 1 to load presets of all Installer Menu
item settings.
Warning: If set to 1, this will reload the factory defaults and clear the Channel List, including any
assigned channel icons and custom channel labels.
118 - POWER SAVINGS
Default is set to 3. When the TV is in Standby mode, the MPI
card slot is powered by the Standby power supply and embedded b-LAN is not powered. When the TV is in Power On mode,
the MPI card slot is powered by the main 12V power supply and
embedded b-LAN is powered. Note that the TV must be turned
ON in order to communicate with the Embedded b-LAN module
for configuration and control when POWER SAVINGS is set to 3.
Note: MPI cards with b-LAN technology—LMT7Z5, LMT7Z7,
LMT7Z9—are NOT supported on TVs in which the b-LAN module
is embedded.
• 1 = MPI card slot Standby Mode power provided from Standby
power supply, and Embedded b-LAN is always powered.
• 3 = MPI card slot Standby Mode power provided from Standby
power supply, and Embedded b-LAN is only powered when the
TV is turned ON.
• 7 = MPI card slot Standby Mode power provided from Standby
power supply, and Embedded b-LAN (including the Pro:Centric
data tuner) is never powered.
Note: See Reference section, “b-LAN Setup & Overview,” for
further information.
119 - DATA CHANNEL
Set to 0 (default) to disable. Set to the RF channel number of the
Data Channel for Pro:Centric or E-Z Installation (splash screen,
configuration, or firmware) data.
Note: Pro:Centric updates are downloaded from the Pro:Centric
server to the TV when the TV is turned OFF. Also, while
Pro:Centric updates are in progress, it is not possible to turn the
TV ON. The TV may take several minutes to load EPG data after
the initial download of the Pro:Centric application. Subsequent
updates generally will take less than one minute.
206-4163
TV Setup Menus Overview
On-screen setup menus control the features of the TV. Press MENU on the Installer Remote to access
the TV setup menus, and set the TV features to the desired configuration for the end user.
CHANNEL
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
OPTION
INPUT
MY MEDIA
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for further information on the TV setup menus.
206-4163
21
Adding Channel Label Icons / Custom Channel Labels
(2-5-4 + MENU Mode)
Editing/Adding Channel Icons and/or Labels
If there is no pre-assigned icon, you can make a custom
channel label of up to seven (7) characters to help identify
a channel or network. If desired, channel labels can also
be added in addition to a pre-assigned icon. You may also
add labels for the Aux input sources to clearly identify the
devices that are connected to the Aux inputs.
(Icon)
XYZ
XYZ
XYZ
NETWORK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Editing and adding the labels can only be done if there are
channels entered into the TV’s Channel Map either during
Commercial Mode Setup (see pages 12 to 13), by cloning,
or by using some PPV provider’s master remote controls.
Note: A blank letter space is available between “Z” and “!”.
To perform channel editing/labeling:
1. Enter the TV Installer Menu.
2. Press 2-5-4 + MENU on the Installer Remote to enter
the Channel Label Editing Mode.
3. Add channel icons and channel labels as described in
the procedures below. (You can do this more than once.)
4. To exit the menu when you are done, press MENU.
(Label)
Changing a Channel’s Icon on
the Master TV
Changing/Adding Channel
Labels on the Master TV
Changing Source Labels on the
Master TV
1. Use Channel Up/Down to select
the channel for which to change the
icon.
1. Use Channel Up/Down to select
the desired channel.
1. Press INPUT to select the desired
Aux input source: A/V 1, A/V 2,
HDMI Component, RGB, etc.
2. Use the Left/Right arrow keys
to select the thin letter “I” on the
Channel ID display.
3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
select the icon with which you want
to identify the channel. (If you know
the icon number, enter the number,
and press ENTER.)
4. Proceed to change/add channel
labels, or go to the next channel.
2. Press the Left/Right arrow repeatedly until the numbers 1 to 7
appear on the display. The number
shows the position of the character
that can be changed. Number 1 is
the first character, number 2 the
second character, etc.
3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
select the desired character.
4. Proceed to the next number position, or use Channel Up/Down to
go to the next channel.
2. Press the Left/Right arrow repeatedly until the numbers 0 to 9
appear on the display. The number
shows the position of the character
that can be changed.
3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
select the desired character.
4. Press INPUT for the next Aux
source, or proceed to change an icon
or change/add labels. Use Channel
Up/Down to return to channels.
Installer Remote Control Key Functions for Master TV Channel Editing/Labeling Menu
• Channel Up/Down: Tunes in the next channel in scan.
• Left/Right Arrows: Select the item to change. If “I” is
shown, the icon can be changed. If a number is shown, it
indicates the position of the character that can be changed.
• Up/Down Arrows: Select the icon or the character to be
displayed. Tip: Arrows can be held down for fast scrolling.
22
• 0 – 9: Use to enter the index number of the icon, if
known.
• ENTER: Changes the icon after the number has been
entered.
• INPUT: Changes the Aux input label.
• MENU: Exits the editing process.
206-4163
FTG Mode of Operation
FTG Configuration Overview
The following steps outline local FTG configuration of individual TVs. Since these models are equipped
with the EBL module, they can also be broadcast configured in FTG Mode by a Free-To-Guest
Management Appliance (FMA) head end device. Refer to the Free-To-Guest (FTG) Configuration
Application manual and/or the Installation & Setup manual for the FMA device for further information.
Note: FTG Configuration Application software is available online at: www.LGcommercial.com/
FTGsoftware.
1. Install (if necessary) and launch the FTG Configuration Application (v5.0.0 or higher) on the PC that
will be used to configure the EBL.
2. Build a Channel Map using the FTG Channel Map Editor in the FTG Channel Map Configuration
Utility (or, if applicable, open an existing FTG Configuration (.rml) file).
3. Connect the PC to the TV-LINK CFG jack on the rear connections panel using a USB-to-TTL serial
cable (TTL-232R-5V-AJ). If necessary, install the device driver on the PC.
4. Turn ON the TV. Note: The TV will briefly display a green text banner that shows the EBL firmware
version and release date.
5. “Write” the FTG Channel Map to the EBL (converts EBL from Pass-through Mode to FTG Mode).
6. “Read” the current FTG Installer Menu settings from the EBL using the FTG Installer Menu
Configuration Utility. If necessary to make changes to Installer Menu items, “Write” them back to the
EBL in FTG Mode.
7. Save the FTG Channel Map and FTG Installer Menu settings to an FTG Configuration (.rml) file for
future use.
8. Tune the TV to a Logical Channel in the FTG Channel Map.
(26LD320H only)
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET
UPDATE
HDMI
2
..........
HDMI
/DVI IN
1
..........
.....
....
RJP
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
.....
.....
.....
(26LD320H only:
GAME CONTROL/MPI)
AV IN 1
VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
GAME
CONTROL
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
ANTENNA IN
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
TV-LINK
CFG
USB-to-TTL
Serial Cable
Required for local
FTG configuration.
R
COMPONENT IN
TV-LINK CFG
Use for local FTG
configuration.
206-4163
Laptop
PC
23
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
Determining the TV Operating Mode / FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility Overview
To determine the operating mode of the
TV, press MENU on the Installer Remote.
If the end user Function Menu (showing
aspect ratio options—see below) appears,
the TV/EBL is in FTG Mode. If the TV
setup menus appear, the EBL is in Passthrough Mode.
The following pages provide overviews of
the FTG Channel Map and FTG Installer
Menu Configuration Utilities that comprise
the FTG Configuration Application. Refer
to the Free-To-Guest (FTG)
Configuration Application manual for
further information.
ASPECT RATIO
Move
Enter
Function Menu
Shows that the EBL is in
FTG Mode. While this menu
is present on-screen,
Installer Menu settings can
ONLY be accessed/changed
using the FTG Configuration
Application.
Set By Program
ABC
4:3
16:9
Zoom
Just Scan
CHANNEL
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
OPTION
INPUT
MY MEDIA
TV Setup Menus
Shows that the EBL is in
Pass-through Mode.
Writing an FTG Channel Map into the EBL will switch the EBL from Pass-through Mode to FTG Mode.
PRINT MAP
Click to display a printable
FTG Channel Map Report. The
report can also be exported as
an HTML or Text file.
EDIT/ADD MAP
Click to open the FTG Channel
Map Editor to create or edit an FTG
Channel Map (see next page).
WRITE
Click to transfer the FTG
Channel Map to the EBL.
READ
Click to transfer the FTG
Channel Map from the EBL to the
FTG Configuration Application.
FTG CHANNEL MAP
CONFIGURATION UTILITY
24
LEARN
Click to transfer the TV Channel Map
from the PTC to the EBL and the FTG
Configuration Application. (Requires that
2-5-5 + MENU was performed to transfer
TV Channel Map to PTC.) *
* Logical Channel numbers will
automatically be assigned in
ascending order, starting with 0
(zero), to the Physical Channels
from the TV Channel Map.
206-4163
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility / FTG Channel Map Editor Overview
The FTG Channel Map Editor shows a single Logical Channel’s Data and the FTG Channel Map.
LOGICAL CHANNEL MAPPING
Select a Logical Channel number, then
assign it the RF, Major, and Minor channel numbers to complete the mapping.
CUSTOM CHANNEL LABELS/ICONS
Enter custom labels and select icons by
name on menu or by number.
DELETE
Click to remove highlighted
channel from FTG Channel
Map.
SET CHANNEL ATTRIBUTES
Check/select Encrypted, OSD, or
Blank Video.
EXIT
Click to exit editor and
return to FTG Channel
Map Configuration Utility.
ADD
After defining a new Logical
Channel, click to add channel
to the FTG Channel Map.
UPDATE
After editing an existing
Logical Channel’s data, click
to commit the changes in the
FTG Channel Map.
206-4163
25
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
FTG Installer Menu Configuration Utility Overview
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
Select tabs for categories of Installer
Menu items to set up TV.
INSTALLER DEFAULTS
Click to reset FTG Installer Menu
items shown in the FTG Configuration
Application to defaults.
IR REMOTE ACCESS
Toggle IR Remote Access to ON to obtain
access to TV setup menus and Installer
Menu.
WRITE
Click to transfer the FTG Installer
Menu settings to the EBL.
HOSPITAL-GRADE TV ONLY
Set Hospital items on Installer Menu
for hospital-grade TVs.
LEARN
Click to transfer Installer
Menu settings from the
PTC to the EBL and FTG
Configuration Application. *
READ
Click to transfer the Installer Menu
settings in the EBL to the FTG
Configuration Application.
* Logical Channel numbers will automatically be
assigned in ascending order, starting with 0 (zero), to
the Physical Channels from the TV Channel Map.
26
206-4163
Cloning Overview / Clonable Menu Features
IMPORTANT CLONING INFORMATION
There are three options for cloning a Master TV Setup:
• Using a USB memory device
• Using a TLL-1100A clone programmer
• Using a LT2002 clone programmer
Each option is described in further detail on the pages that
follow. As you perform cloning procedures, be sure to complete each task as indicated. If a procedure or step is omitted or not performed completely, cloning may not work. At
each step, pay attention to ensure the TV screen shows
the proper message when cloning. If the message indicated does not appear, there is a problem with that step, and
cloning may not be successful.
Warning: Copying a blank or incorrect memory
into a TV will cause the TV to operate erratically
or become inoperable.
Warning: Do not connect a clone programmer to
a PPV card installed in the Master or Target TVs.
Also, if the TV is in LodgeNet PPV Mode (check
with the site administrator if you are not certain), do not connect a clone programmer to the
GAME CONTROL/MPI port. Either of these
actions will damage the clone programmer and,
if applicable, the PPV card.
Before you begin cloning:
• Complete the Commercial Mode Setup procedure on
pages 12 to 13.
• All equipment should be connected to power and turned
ON.
• Learning and Teaching is only possible between identical
model TVs.
• For both Master and Target TVs—The TV EBL must be in
Pass-through Mode.
• If using a USB memory device, ensure the USB device
has been formatted with FAT format.
• For both Master and Target TVs—If using a clone programmer, ensure the TV signal source is either an Aux
or TV (RF) source. If a TV (RF) source, the TV must be
tuned to an analog (not a digital) channel.
• LT2002 only—Make sure the batteries in the clone programmer are fresh. If batteries are removed, the clone
programmer clock time (if set) will be lost (see page 32
for information on the clone programmer clock).
• Do not unplug the TV power cord or remove/disconnect
the USB memory device/clone programmer while Learning
or Teaching, as doing so may cause the TV to malfunction
or harm the USB device/clone programmer, respectively.
Clonable Menu Features
Installer Menu
Installer Menu item settings
Channel
Auto Tuning (Channel Lineup)
Manual Tuning
Channel Edit
Channel Label
Picture
Aspect Ratio
Picture Mode
Advanced Control
Audio
Auto Volume
Clear Voice
Sound Mode
Balance
TV Speaker
Option
Menu Language
Audio Language
Caption
Caption Mode
Digital Caption Options
Lock
Movie Rating
TV Rating – Children
TV Rating – General
Input Block
Time
Auto Clock
Manual Clock
Off Time
On Time
Auto Off (Sleep Timer)
Note: Some menu options vary between analog and digital channels and Aux sources.
206-4163
27
Cloning Procedures
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using a USB Memory Device
USB Cloning Notes
• Read the IMPORTANT CLONING INFORMATION on page 27 before beginning any cloning procedures.
• You may edit a filename as part of the Learning procedure; however, a file with edited contents will not be
recognized.
• It is not possible to clone a Master TV’s clock using a USB memory device. Either set a Target TV’s clock
manually, or use the Auto Clock setting in the TV setup menus.
Learn Setup from Master TV
1. Ensure the Master TV is set up completely and the EBL is in Pass-through Mode.
USB Download Menu
2. Plug the USB memory device into the USB IN port on the Master TV.
Upgrade TV Software
3. Press MENU to display the TV setup menus.
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV
4. Use the arrow navigation keys to select/highlight the Option menu icon; then, press
the number “7” key a total of seven times to display the USB Download Menu.
Learn From TV
5. To gain access to the Learn From TV option in the USB Download Menu, key in the
password used to enter the Installer Menu (Example: Press 9-8-7-6).
Learn From TV
Previous
►
Select the file name and press OK to start
6. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Learn From TV and press ENTER.
8. Remove the USB memory device.
xxLD320H-UA00001.TLL
►
7. To identify the profile from others, you can use the Up/Down arrow keys to change
the last five digits of the filename. Press ENTER when you are ready to initiate
Learning.
Learning status will be shown on the progress bar. When the Learning process is
complete, the USB Download menu will reappear on screen.
Enter
Previous
!
Enter
Learn From TV
UPDATING...
25%
Do not remove the USB from the port!
Do not unplug!
Teach Master TV Setup to Target TV
1. Ensure the Target TV EBL is in Pass-through Mode, and then plug the USB memory
device with the Master TV Setup file into the Target TV USB IN port.
2. Press MENU to display the TV setup menus.
3. Use the arrow navigation keys to select/highlight the Option menu icon; then, press
the number “7” key a total of seven times to display the USB Download Menu.
4. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Teach To TV and press ENTER.
5. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select/highlight the Master TV Setup you want to
install and press ENTER. Note: Filenames identify the TV and the TLL version (see
example at right).
Teaching status will be shown on the progress bar. When the Teaching process is
complete, the USB Download menu will reappear on screen.
6. When Teaching is done, remove the USB memory device, turn OFF the TV, and
unplug the TV power cord for 15 seconds.
7. Reconnect the TV power cord, and turn ON the TV. The Master TV Setup should
be resident on the Target TV.
28
USB Download Menu
Upgrade TV Software
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV
Learn From TV
Previous
Enter
Teach To TV
xxLD320H-UA00001.TLL
Previous
!
Enter
Teach To TV
UPDATING...
50%
Do not remove the USB from the port!
Do not unplug!
206-4163
Cloning Procedures (Cont.)
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using a TLL-1100A Clone Programmer
Cloning is accomplished using the TV/
clone programmer MPI ports for communication (see figure).
TLL-1100A Cloning Notes
• Read the IMPORTANT CLONING
INFORMATION on page 27 before
beginning any cloning procedures.
• Ensure the TLL-1100A is either fully
charged or connected to AC power.
• Learning and Teaching is only
possible between identical model
TVs; however, the TLL-1100A clone
programmer can store up to eight
different Master TV Setups.
TLL-1100A Clone
Programmer
CHARGE
Warning: Do not connect a clone programmer to a PPV card installed in the Master or Target
TVs. Also, if the TV is in LodgeNet PPV Mode (check with the site administrator if you are
not certain), do not connect a clone programmer to the GAME CONTROL/MPI port. Either of
these actions will damage the clone programmer and, if applicable, the PPV card.
TV Link
Loader
TLL1100A
Ready
Antenna
or CATV
MODE
CLONE SELECTION MENU
Selected Bank: CBankX Saved
(1) LEARN FROM TV
(2) TEACH TO TV
(3) SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
(4) SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
(5) DISPLAY TV SETUP
(6) DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
MPI
Cable
MENU
ENTER
RECEIVE
SEND
TLL-1100A
Learn Setup from Master TV
1. Ensure the Master TV is set up completely and the EBL is in Passthrough Mode.
2. If an analog channel is not available, direct tune the TV to an Aux source,
or select an Aux source, such as AV-1, from the Input Menu. Then, plug
one end of the MPI cable into the TV MPI port.
3. Turn ON the TLL-1100A.
4. Use the MODE button on the TLL-1100A to select Clone Mode.
5. Use the Left/Right arrows on the TLL-1100A to select the Memory CBank
(1 to 8) in which to store the Master TV Setup.
6. Plug the other end of the MPI cable into the MPI port on the bottom of the
TLL-1100A. The Clone Selection Menu will display on the TV screen.
7. Press 1 on the Installer Remote to select LEARN FROM TV from the
Clone Selection Menu. Then, press ENTER to transfer the Master TV
Setup into CBankX on the TLL-1100A.
Learning usually takes about 90 seconds. “LEARNING IN PROGRESS”
will be displayed on the screen while the TLL-1100A copies the Master
Setup. When the Learning process is complete, a “LEARNING COMPLETE” message will be displayed.
206-4163
CLONE SELECTION MENU
Selected Bank: CBankX Saved
(1) LEARN FROM TV
(2) TEACH TO TV
(3) SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
(4) SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
(5) DISPLAY TV SETUP
(6) DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
THE CLONE IS VERSION VX.X.X
- To change menu items, press
channel keys or digits.
- To execute item, press Enter.
29
Cloning Procedures (Cont.)
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using a TLL-1100A Clone Programmer (Cont.)
(Optional) Set the Clock
Set the time on a Master TV’s clock. (If the time has already been copied
from a TV into the TLL-1100A clone programmer, you can set the Master
TV’s clock by copying the time from the clone programmer.) The TLL1100A can copy the current time to both a Master TV and to the clone’s
internal clock—accurate to within one minute.
Since the TLL-1100A’s time cannot be set directly, the current time needs
to be copied from an LG TV equipped with an enabled MPI port.
After the time is copied to the TLL-1100A clone programmer, the current
time will be maintained and can then be transferred to another TV. (This
can be a Master TV or another TV which has already had the features set
up.)
CLONE SELECTION MENU
Selected Bank: CBankX Saved
(1) LEARN FROM TV
(2) TEACH TO TV
(3) SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
(4) SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
(5) DISPLAY TV SETUP
(6) DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
THE CLONE IS VERSION VX.X.X
- To change menu items, press
channel keys or digits.
- To execute item, press Enter.
Teach Master TV Setup to Target TV
1. When Learning is complete, disconnect the MPI cable from the Master TV.
2. Ensure the Target TV EBL is in Pass-through Mode and the TV is tuned/
set to an analog channel or Aux source, and then connect the MPI cable
to the MPI port on the Target TV. The Clone Selection Menu will display
on the TV screen.
3. Ensure the correct Memory CBank(X) is selected on the TLL-1100A.
4. Press 2 on the Installer Remote to select TEACH TO TV from the Clone
Selection Menu. Then, press ENTER to transfer the Master TV Setup to
the Target TV.
Teaching usually takes 3 to 4 minutes. “TEACHING IN PROGRESS” will
be displayed on the screen during Teaching. When the Teaching process
is complete, a “TEACHING COMPLETE” message will be displayed.
5. When Teaching is done, disconnect the MPI cable from the Target TV,
turn OFF the TV, and unplug the TV power cord for 15 seconds.
6. Reconnect the TV power cord, and turn ON the TV. The Master TV
Setup should be resident on the Target TV.
30
CLONE SELECTION MENU
Selected Bank: CBankX Saved
(1) LEARN FROM TV
(2) TEACH TO TV
(3) SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
(4) SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
(5) DISPLAY TV SETUP
(6) DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
THE CLONE IS VERSION VX.X.X
- To change menu items, press
channel keys or digits.
- To execute item, press Enter.
206-4163
Cloning Procedures (Cont.)
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using an LT2002 Clone Programmer
Warning: Do not connect a clone programmer to a PPV card installed in the Master or Target
TVs. Also, if the TV is in LodgeNet PPV Mode (check with the site administrator if you are
not certain), do not connect a clone programmer to the GAME CONTROL/MPI port. Either of
these actions will damage the clone programmer and, if applicable, the PPV card.
Cloning is accomplished using the TV/
clone programmer MPI ports for communication (see figure).
LT2002 Cloning Notes
• Read the IMPORTANT CLONING
INFORMATION on page 27 before
beginning any cloning procedures.
• A slow flashing green light indicates
that there are communication problems
between the TV and the LT2002 clone
programmer. If this is the case, check
for a damaged cable, poor contacts, or
other connection troubles.
• If the status indicator is red, the LT2002
batteries are low and should be replaced. Install four (4) high-quality
alkaline AA batteries.
MPI
Cable
Antenna
or CATV
Ferrite Core
(TDK, ZCAT
2035-0930)
$POOFDUDBCMFUP
57.1*+BDLBOE
GPMMPXPOTDSFFO
instructions
Status
*OEJDBUPS
MPI
$PMPS
tHSFFO CBUUFSZPL
tSFE
CBUUFSZMPX
Reset
#MJOLQBUUFSO
tTMPX QPXFSPO
no communications
tIFBSUCFBUQPXFSPO
communications ok
THE CLONE HAS CONTROL OF THE TV
THE CLONE IS VERSION XX
THE TV IS VERSION XX
THE SW IS REViSION XX
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
®
QuickSet II Programmer
LT2002
- PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
LT2002 Clone
Programmer
ZENITH ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, LINCOLNSHIRE, ILLINOIS, USA
• Learning and Teaching is only possible
between identical model TVs; however, the
LT2002 clone programmer can store up to
three different Master TV Setups.
Learn Setup from Master TV
THE CLONE HAS CONTROL OF THE TV
1. Ensure the Master TV is set up completely and the EBL is in Passthrough Mode.
2. If an analog channel is not available, direct tune the TV to an Aux
source, or select an Aux source, such as AV-1, from the Input Menu.
Then, plug one end of the MPI cable into the TV MPI port.
3. If there is a good connection after the LT2002 is connected to the TV
MPI port, “THE CLONE HAS CONTROL OF THE TV” message will
appear on the TV screen. Press any key on the Installer Remote to
access the LT2002 Clone Selection Menu.
4. Press 1 on the Installer Remote to select LEARN FROM TV from the
Clone Selection Menu; then press ENTER to proceed to the Memory
Bank Selection Menu (see sample screen on next page).
5. Select the clone Memory Bank in which to store the Master Setup by
pressing either Channel key repeatedly to choose Memory Bank 1, 2,
or 3. Note: If you choose a Memory Bank that already has a Master
device’s setup programmed into it, that setup will be overwritten by the
new Master TV Setup.
THE CLONE IS VERSION XX
THE TV IS VERSION
XX
THE SW IS REVISION
XX
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
- PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
- DISCONNECT CLONE WHEN DONE.
CLONE SELECTION MENU
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
LEARN FROM TV
TEACH TO TV
SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
DISPLAY TV SETUP
DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
(Continued on next page)
206-4163
31
Cloning Procedures (Cont.)
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using an LT2002 Clone Programmer (Cont.)
(Continued from previous page)
6. Once you select the clone Memory Bank, press ENTER on the Installer
Remote. The Memory Bank you selected will be shown.
7. Press POWER to transfer the Master TV Setup into the selected Memory
Bank on the LT2002.
Learning usually takes about 90 seconds. “LEARNING IN PROGRESS”
will be displayed on the screen while the LT2002 copies the Master
Setup. When the Learning process is complete, a “LEARNING COMPLETE” message will be displayed.
SAVE TV SETUP IN SELECTED
CLONE MEMORY
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
MEMORY 1 VER XX REV XX
MEMORY 2 VER XX REV XX
MEMORY 3 VER XX REV XX
RETURN TO CLONE MENU
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
(Optional) Set the Clock
Set the time on a Master TV’s clock. (If the time has already been copied
from a TV into the LT2002 clone programmer, you can set the Master TV’s
clock by copying the time from the clone programmer.) The LT2002 can copy
the current time to both a Master TV and to the clone’s internal clock—accurate to within one minute. (Another reason that the LT2002 should be
equipped with fresh, high-quality alkaline batteries, is for it to keep the time
as accurately as possible.)
Since the LT2002’s time cannot be set directly, the current time needs to
be copied from an LG TV equipped with an enabled MPI port.
CLONE SELECTION MENU
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
LEARN FROM TV
TEACH TO TV
SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
DISPLAY TV SETUP
DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
After the time is copied to the LT2002 clone programmer, the current time
will be maintained and can then be transferred to another TV. (This can be a
Master TV or another TV which has already had the features set up.)
Teach Master TV Setup to Target TV
1. When Learning is complete, disconnect the MPI cable from the Master TV.
2. Ensure the Target TV EBL is in Pass-through Mode and the TV is tuned/
set to an analog channel or Aux source, and then connect the MPI cable
to the MPI port on the Target TV.
3. With “THE CLONE HAS CONTROL OF TV” message on display, press
2 on the Installer Remote to select TEACH TO TV from the LT2002
Clone Selection Menu. Then, press ENTER.
4. Select the LT2002 Memory Bank in which the new setup is located.
Then, press POWER to transfer the Master TV Setup to the Target TV.
Teaching usually takes 3 to 4 minutes. “TEACHING IN PROGRESS” will
be displayed on the screen during Teaching. When the Teaching process
is complete, a “TEACHING COMPLETE” message will be displayed.
5. When Teaching is done, press any key on the Installer Remote to return
to the Clone Selection Menu. Then, press ENTER.
6. Disconnect the MPI cable from the Target TV, turn OFF the TV, and
unplug the TV power cord for 15 seconds.
7. Reconnect the TV power cord, and turn ON the TV. The Master TV
Setup should be resident on the Target TV.
32
CLONE SELECTION MENU
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
LEARN FROM TV
TEACH TO TV
SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
DISPLAY TV SETUP
DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
COPY SELECTED CLONE MEMORY
TO TV
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
MEMORY 1 VER XX REV XX
MEMORY 2 VER XX REV XX
MEMORY 3 VER XX REV XX
RETURN TO CLONE MENU
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
206-4163
Remote Jack Pack / TV Connections & Setup
Remote Jack Pack Setup
RJP Available? If you will use a Remote Jack Pack (RJP) in your system, set Installer Menu item 093
RJP AVAILABLE appropriately (for example, on a legacy model RJP: HDMI Mode, set RJP AVAILABLE
to 001). See Installer Menu detailed descriptions for further information.
093
RJP AVAILABLE
001
TV Connections
Make these connections ONLY after Commercial Mode Setup and Cloning Master TV
procedures are complete.
Refer to the figure below, and connect the RJ-45 Control cable from the RJP cable bundle to the RJP
INTERFACE port on the TV’s jack panel. Then, connect HDMI, RGB, and Composite Video/Audio connectors, as applicable, for the cable bundle.
AUDIO/VIDEO IN 1
Connect Composite Video/
Audio connectors from RJP
cable bundle. (Composite
Video on legacy RJP only.)
RJP
Connect RJ-45 Control cable
from RJP cable bundle.
(26LD320H only)
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
HDMI
HDMI
/DVI IN
RESET
UPDATE
2
..........
1
..........
ANTENNA IN
.....
....
RJP
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
.....
.....
.....
AV IN 1
GAME
CONTROL
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT (8 )
Y
PB
VIDEO
(26LD320H only:
GAME CONTROL/MPI)
VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
PR
L
AUDIO
TV-LINK
CFG
R
COMPONENT IN
RGB IN (PC)
Connect RGB connector from RJP
cable bundle (legacy RJP only).
HDMI/DVI IN 1
Connect HDMI connector
from RJP cable bundle.
206-4163
33
Reference: Upgrading TV/PTC Software using a USB Memory Device
Checking the Software Versions
XXLD320H PTC INSTALLER MENU
Note: This function is not accessible while the TV is
in FTG or PPV Mode.
You can check the software versions of the TV by
accessing the Installer Menu with the Installer
Remote: Press MENU repeatedly until the on-screen
setup menus lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 +
ENTER. When you are finished, press ENTER again
to exit the Installer Menu.
000
INSTALLER SEQ
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.000
PTC Version
000
Typical Installer
Menu
FPGA E0F1
CPU V3.06.00
CPU Version
Upgrading TV/PTC Software
Before you begin, note that the software upgrade files must be stored in a folder
named “LG_DTV” in the root directory of the USB memory device. Also, ensure
the USB device has been formatted with FAT format.
Note for TV Software Upgrade only: If the TV detects a later version of software
on the USB device, it will automatically display a dialog from which you can start the
software upgrade immediately. Otherwise, you can close the dialog, and access the
USB Download Menu as described below.
1. Turn the TV ON.
USB Download Menu
Upgrade TV Software
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV
Previous
Enter
TV Software Update (Expert)
2. Plug the USB memory device into the USB IN port on the TV.
3. Press MENU on the Installer Remote to display the TV setup menus.
4. Use the arrow navigation keys to select/highlight either the Option (if EBL is in
Pass-through Mode) or Lock (if TV is in FTG or LodgeNet PPV Mode) menu
icon; then, press the number “7” key a total of seven times to display the USB
Download Menu.
TV Software Update
5. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Upgrade TV Software or Upgrade
PTC Software, as applicable, and press ENTER.
6. Select the appropriate option(s), depending on the type of upgrade you are
performing:
• TV Software Upgrade: (See screen samples at right.) Select TV Software
Update from the first TV Software Update window. In the second TV Software
Update window, select/highlight the update file to install and press ENTER.
Note: Do not select Forced Update options unless you have been specifically
instructed to do so or have previous experience with Expert Software Updates.
• PTC Software Upgrade: In the PTC Software Update window, select/highlight
the update file to install and press ENTER.
Note: The PTC Software Update window is similar to the second TV Software Update window, though there are no Forced Update options. Current
software version information is shown at the top and update files on the USB
device are listed at the bottom of the window.
LOGO Image Download
TV Software Update (Expert)
[ Current TV Software Version Information ]
EPK : 03.03.00
The following software files are found in the memory card.
Select the file you want to download to this TV
or press EXIT to cancel the update.
EPK : 03.05.00
[ Forced Update Option ]
Ext. MICOM
SPI Boot
LOGO Image
xxLD320H_v3_05_RevNo4204_USB
The TV will show update completion progress in a new window. Do NOT remove the USB device
until the software upgrade is complete. When a TV software upgrade is complete, the TV will
reset itself with an automatic restart. When a PTC upgrade is complete, the TV will turn OFF.
34
206-4163
Reference: Downloading a Splash Screen using a USB Memory Device
Splash Screen Image File Guidelines
• The splash screen image must be a baseline (not progressive) JPEG.
• The image should be no larger than 1 MB.
• The ideal size for the image is 1366 x 768 pixels or under.
USB Download Menu
Upgrade TV Software
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV
Previous
• The image file must be stored in a folder named “LG_DTV” in the root
directory of USB memory device.
Enter
TV Software Update (Expert)
• Ensure the USB device has been formatted with FAT format.
Downloading a Splash Screen Image
1. Turn the TV ON.
2. Plug the USB memory device into the USB IN port on the TV.
3. Press MENU on the Installer Remote to display the TV setup menus.
4. Use the arrow navigation keys to select/highlight either the Option (if EBL is in
Pass-through Mode) or Lock (if TV is in FTG or LodgeNet PPV Mode) menu
icon; then, press the number “7” key a total of seven times to display the USB
Download Menu.
5. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Upgrade TV Software and then press
ENTER.
6. Select LOGO Image Download from the first TV Software Update window.
TV Software Update
LOGO Image Download
TV Software Update (Expert)
The following software files are found in the memory card.
Select the file you want to download to this TV
or press EXIT to cancel the update.
7. In the second TV Software Update window, select/highlight the image file to
download and press ENTER.
The TV will show download completion progress in a new window. Do NOT
remove the USB device until the image download is complete. When the image
download is complete, the TV will reset itself with an automatic restart. Upon the
restart, you should see the new splash screen.
206-4163
Splash Image 1366 X 768 ProCentric
35
Reference: Power Consumption Settings
The following tables assume that Installer Menu item 118 POWER SAVINGS is set to 003 (default) and
Installer Menu item 099 BACK LIGHTING is set as shown below (default value is 100).
26LD320H
Item 099
Back Lighting
(Static)
32LD320H / 32LD325H
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
Percent
Savings
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
100
56.82
0.00%
72.97
0.00%
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
1
51.98
47.09
42.06
39.71
37.36
36.31
35.12
32.59
30.23
27.95
8.52%
17.13%
25.97%
30.12%
34.25%
36.10%
38.19%
42.64%
46.80%
50.82%
63.82
58.53
53.58
44.24
41.27
38.71
36.20
33.51
31.01
28.55
12.54%
19.78%
26.57%
39.38%
43.45%
46.95%
50.39%
54.07%
57.51%
60.87%
26LD320H
Item 099
Back Lighting
(Dynamic)
Percent
Savings
32LD320H / 32LD325H
37LD320H / 37LD325H
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
42LD320H
Percent
Savings
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
88.92
0.00%
107.53
0.00%
84.19
77.84
72.19
66.28
60.90
56.58
52.35
47.75
43.68
39.62
5.32%
12.46%
18.81%
25.46%
31.51%
36.37%
41.13%
46.30%
50.88%
55.44%
86.68
78.79
72.81
66.78
60.61
56.35
52.90
47.71
43.04
38.86
19.39%
26.73%
32.29%
37.89%
43.63%
47.60%
50.81%
55.63%
59.98%
63.86%
37LD320H / 37LD325H
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
Percent
Savings
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
Percent
Savings
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
200
72.19
0.00%
75.45
0.00%
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
101
68.21
63.72
59.21
55.04
50.81
46.03
41.49
36.32
31.52
26.95
5.51%
11.74%
17.99%
23.76%
29.62%
36.24%
42.53%
49.69%
56.34%
62.67%
69.23
65.26
60.72
56.29
51.82
46.62
41.67
36.14
31.11
26.41
8.25%
13.51%
19.53%
25.40%
31.33%
38.21%
44.78%
52.10%
58.76%
65.00%
Percent
Savings
42LD320H
Percent
Savings
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
110.86
0.00%
125.41
0.00%
99.05
92.33
85.39
78.61
71.70
63.53
55.65
47.34
39.90
33.00
10.65%
16.72%
22.98%
29.10%
35.32%
42.69%
49.80%
57.30%
64.01%
70.24%
111.41
103.30
95.29
87.64
79.71
70.73
61.80
51.86
42.90
34.52
11.16%
17.63%
24.02%
30.11%
36.44%
43.60%
50.72%
58.65%
65.79%
72.47%
Percent
Savings
Note: Values are results of controlled experiments under laboratory conditions.
36
206-4163
Reference: TV Camport Auto Sense Operation
The Camport Auto Sense function is enabled when:
1. Installer Menu item 034 CAMPORT EN is set to 1 AND
2. Installer Menu item 040 AUTO CAMPORT is enabled (1).
Selectable: Can be accessed with INPUT key, direct
access, etc.
Auto Sense: TV switches to this input when connector is
inserted. The Camport (Side [AV IN 2] Video) has the
highest priority and will override any commands including
tuning to the Start Channel.
Camport Operation (Stand-alone)
When Camport Auto Sense is enabled as above, the TV’s
source will switch to the Side (AV IN 2) Video Aux source
whenever a plug is inserted into the AV IN 2 Video input.
When the plug is removed, the TV will switch back to the
previous channel or input source that was being displayed
before the plug was inserted. However, if any direct access
to an RF channel or Aux channel is requested while the
Camport is active, then, when the video plug is removed,
the TV will switch to the last requested channel. Source
changes using any Source keys (INPUT) are ignored.
Channel Up/Down and Flashback commands are not direct
access tuning commands, and they are also ignored.
Camport Operation (FTG or PPV)
The operation will be similar to that of the Stand-alone
Mode. However, when the Channel Map is maintained
external to the PTC (i.e., FTG and PPV), Channel Up/
Down or Flashback keys are sent as Direct Access tuning
commands to the PTC/TV.
206-4163
CAMPORT (Side Video) Functionality Control
Item 034
CAMPORT EN
Item 040
AUTO CAMPORT
Side (AV IN 2)
Video Operation
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Disabled
1
0
Selectable
1
1
Auto Sense
Previous State
Before Inserting
CAMPORT
Operation While
CAMPORT is
Active
State Upon
Removal of
CAMPORT
Aux or RF
Channel
None
Previous Aux
or RF Channel
Aux or RF
Channel
Direct Access
Last Requested
Aux or RF Channel
Aux or RF
Channel
Ch Up/Down,
Flashback, and
Input Keys
Previous Aux
or RF Channel
Previous State
Before Inserting
CAMPORT
Operation While
CAMPORT is
Active
State Upon
Removal of
CAMPORT
Aux or RF
Channel
None
Previous Aux
or RF Channel
Aux or RF
Channel
Direct Access
Last Requested
Aux or RF Channel
Aux or RF
Channel
Ch Up/Down,
Flashback, and
Input Keys
Last Requested Aux
or RF Channel
37
Reference: TV Aux Input Configuration
ENABLE
DIRECT ACCESS
Tuning
TV
Installer Menu
MPI DATA
MPI DATA
STATUS TYPE
0x41 SOURCES
ENABLED (R/W)
DATA STATUS
TYPE 0xD2
CURRENT AV
SOURCE (R)
DATA STATUS
TYPE 0x0D
AUX
SOURCE (R)
START AUX
SOURCE
ASSIGNMENT
OLD_
OCV = 0
OLD_
OCV = 1
Source
Input
Source
Mode
Number
Labeling
Value
Labeling
Value
Labeling
130
90
Video2
(Side)
CV
34
CAMPORT_EN
0x01
Video Front
(Camport)
0
Video Front
(Camport)
0 (VIDEO)
2
131
91
Video1
(Rear)
CV
39
REAR_AUX_EN
0x02
Rear Video
(Aux)
1
Rear Video
(Aux)
0 (VIDEO)
1
132
92
HDMI2
DTV/PC
91
YPrPb2 EN = 1
0x04
S-Video Rear
2
S-Video Rear
0 (VIDEO)
5
133
93
HDMI1/DVI
DTV/PC
35
COMPPORT_EN
=1
0x08
Front
Computer
3
Front
Computer
0 (VIDEO)
3
134
94
RGB
PC
87
REAR RGB EN
=2
0x10
SVGA Rear
Computer
4
SVGA Rear
Computer
2
(COMPUTER)
4
136
96
Component
38
YPrPb EN
0x40
Y/UV
Component
6
Rear Y/PrPb
Component
Video
0 (VIDEO)
6
38
206-4163
Reference: b-LAN Setup & Overview
The b-LAN module is internal to the TV. It allows the hotel/institution head end equipment to communicate, via
the institution’s RF distribution system, with the TV for configuration and control.
Note: MPI cards with b-LAN technology—LMT7Z5, LMT7Z7, LMT7Z9—are NOT supported on TVs in which the
b-LAN module is embedded.
Power to the b-LAN module is controlled by Installer Menu item 118 POWER SAVINGS. The default value is
003—the b-LAN module is only powered when the TV is turned ON. See chart below.
TV Standby State
TV Power On State
b-LAN Power
b-LAN Power
001
On
On
003 (default)
Off
On
007
Off
Off
POWER
SAVINGS
The control device at the head end, for example, an LG FMA-LG101, can control multiple TVs. When the TV is
first installed, it must be turned ON in order for the head end to be able to communicate with the b-LAN. At this
point, if it is desired for the b-LAN to always be powered, including while the TV is in Standby, set Installer Menu
item 118 POWER SAVINGS to 001.
If the embedded b-LAN will not be used, enable maximum power savings in both Standby and TV Power On
Mode by setting Installer Menu item 118 POWER SAVINGS to 007.
206-4163
39
Reference: RJP Model List and Input Auto-sensing Hierarchy
RJP Model List
Legacy Models
Scaler Models
RJP-101M
N/A
RJP-101ML
N/A
RJP-110F
RJP-210F
RJP-110FW
RJP-210FW
RJP-110W
RJP-210W
RJP-110WBR
RJP-210WBR
RJP-110S
RJP-210S
RJP-120G
RJP-220G
RJP-120T
RJP-220T
RJP-201B
RJP-301B
RJP-202B
RJP-302B
RJP Input Auto-sensing Hierarchy
40
Priority
Video
Audio
1st (Highest)
Digital Video In
Audio In (3.5mm)
2nd
PC Video In
Audio In (L/R)
3rd
Video In
Digital Video In
206-4163
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Some Quick and Easy Tips for Resolving Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
Channel not included in channel lineup in
TV controller.
After 2-5-5 + MENU, only channels included in TV controller
will appear. If channel is available, it can be added to channel lineup. If it is not available, the “No Signal” message
appears on the TV screen.
Software Problems
Cannot direct enter
channel number or “No
Signal” appears.
Power
No power.
See troubleshooting flow chart on following page.
Display Panel Picture
No picture.
Display panel is turned off.
• Turn TV ON.
• Power failure?
Antenna/cable not connected.
Connect antenna/cable signal to TV.
Connections incorrect.
Check connections on TV.
MPI not connected.
If applicable, connect MPI cable to MPI device.
Encrypted program.
Try another channel.
Wrong tuning band.
Adjust Installer Menu settings.
Wrong Installer Menu settings.
Adjust Installer Menu settings as required.
Remote not in TV Mode.
Use MODE key to select “TV”; puts remote into TV Mode.
Not aimed at IR remote sensor.
Point remote at TV’s IR receiver on TV.
Remote too far from IR sensor.
Move remote closer to TV’s IR receiver or darken room.
Erratic Operation
Installer Menu setup.
Installer Remote
Remote doesn’t work.
MPI not connected.
If applicable, connect MPI cable to MPI device.
IR path to TV’s receiver obstructed.
Remove obstructions.
Weak batteries.
Replace batteries.
Wrong battery polarity.
Check that “+” and “-” match in battery compartment.
Too much light in room.
Dim room light.
Wrong Installer Remote.
Requires compatible Installer Remote. Contact your LG
dealer.
Audio muted.
Press MUTE or use Volume Up key to increase sound level.
Broadcast problem.
Try a different channel.
Picture Reception
Normal picture,
poor or no sound.
Note: For other problems not caused by the TV, refer to the other devices’ operating guide(s).
206-4163
41
Troubleshooting (Cont.)
Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Controller
Quick Check
STATUS
LED on PTC
Board
blinking?
No
TV
connected
to AC
Power?
No
Plug into AC
Power outlet.
Yes
Yes
Bad
TV
Cycle the power by
removing and reconnecting
the AC Power cord. Then,
observe POWER LED
on front of TV.
POWER
LED lit?
No
Bad Analog or
Digital Board
TV
responded?
No
Bad
TV
No
Bad
PPV Card
Yes
Yes
Press POWER on
Installer Remote.
TV
turned ON?
Press VOLUME UP/
DOWN or MUTE key on
User-supplied Remote.
No
Bad
TV
TV
responded?
Yes
Yes
Press VOLUME UP/
DOWN or MUTE key
on Installer Remote.
42
End
206-4163
Troubleshooting (Cont.)
Commercial Mode Check / FTG Operation Troubleshooting
Commercial Mode Check
Press POWER on
Installer Remote.
TV
responded?
No
Bad
TV
Yes
Leave the TV set ON.
Go to Installer Menu
by pressing MENU until
the on-screen setup
menus lock up (i.e.,
stop responding).
TV
stopped
responding or
continued to
respond?
Stopped
responding
TV is in
Commercial Mode.
Continued
to respond
TV is not in Commercial
Mode. Call Technical
Support for assistance.
FTG Operation Troubleshooting
The following table provides troubleshooting information for when the EBL is configured in the FTG Mode of operation.
Symptom
Possible Cause(s)
Solution(s)
Communication Error
(“Communications
Timeout”)
Cable(s) not connected.
Check and connect communication cables.
TV not powered.
Check/connect the TV power cord.
TV not turned ON.
TV needs to be turned ON (default FTG Mode).
Wrong COM
(communication) port.
In the FTG Configuration Application, select the correct
COM port for the cable being used.
206-4163
43
Troubleshooting (Cont.)
Clone Programmer Troubleshooting
Warning: Do not connect a clone programmer to
a PPV card installed in the Master or Target TVs.
Also, if the TV is in LodgeNet PPV Mode (check
with the site administrator if you are not certain), do not
connect a clone programmer to the GAME CONTROL/
MPI port. Either of these actions will damage the clone
programmer and, if applicable, the PPV card.
Reset Clone Programmer After Static Shock
After replacing exhausted batteries (LT2002 only), or if the
clone programmer behaves strangely after a static shock:
• TLL-1100A: Turn the TLL-1100A OFF and then ON.
• LT2002: Use a paper clip or similar instrument inserted
through the small hole marked RESET to activate the internal
reset switch and restore normal operation.
Symptom
After a reset, check the real-time clock setting. It may be necessary to set the clone programmer clock from a TV containing the correct time.
Notes
• The TLL-1100A and LT2002 clone programmers are designed
to be used with TVs containing the 221-01006 and later processors. Use with earlier TVs may give unpredictable results.
Processors used before the 221-01006-04 have a limited
screen display capability; they cannot display entire screens
as shown in the setup instructions accompanying the clone
programmer. Use the printed menu illustrations in the documentation as an aid to making your programming choices.
• For both Master and Target TVs—The TV EBL must be in
Pass-through Mode for cloning purposes. See also
IMPORTANT CLONING INFORMATION on page 27.
Possible Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
Clone copies setup in less
than 30 seconds.
Not enough time to copy entire
TV setup.
TLL-1100A: Turn the TLL-1100A Off and then ON.
LT2002: Press RESET on clone programmer.
Then redo Learn/Teach. (Learning usually takes about 90 seconds; Teaching usually takes 3 to 4 minutes.)
Remote does not operate
clone programmer.
Wrong Installer Remote.
Only use an LG Installer Remote to operate clone programmer
with TV.
Clone menu does not display on TV screen, TLL1100A shows error message, or LT2002 LED does
not blink.
MPI cord not connected.
Connect MPI cord properly, and ensure good connection.
TV not turned ON.
TV must be powered ON for clone programmer to work.
(LT2002 only) Weak batteries.
Install four (4) fresh AA high-quality alkaline batteries.
(TLL-1100A only) No charge.
Ensure the TLL-1100A is fully charged or connected to AC power.
Clone menu hard to read.
Weak signal.
Connect TV to a reliable analog channel signal source.
No time set.
Time not available.
Set time on a TV, and copy time to clone programmer.
Clone not working.
Clone programmer problem.
• Try a different clone programmer.
• Reset the clone programmer.
Clone scans channels
more than once.
Clone should only scan channels Ensure TV is set up correctly, and try cloning again.
once.
Clone Programmer
Master and Target TVs
Cloning did not work.
Procedure interrupted.
Wait until procedure complete message is displayed.
Different TV models.
Cloning is only possible with identical model TVs.
Step(s) omitted or not performed.
Refer to the applicable cloning procedure(s), and make sure all
tasks were performed.
(LT2002 only) Clone time
disappeared.
Batteries were removed.
Batteries must remain installed to retain time settings.
New setup not present.
Target TV not reset.
Disconnect Target TV from AC power for fifteen (15) seconds.
• After cloning operations are complete, unplug the TLL-1100A/LT2002 from the TV.
• If the TV does not display a picture (blank screen) after a few seconds, just change channels.
44
206-4163
Glossary of Terms
A list of definitions for some of the words found in this guide.
75 OHM RF CABLE
The wire that comes from an off-air
antenna or cable service provider. The
end looks like a hex-shaped nut with a
wire through the middle. It screws onto
the Antenna/Cable threaded jack on the
back of the TV.
300 TO 75 OHM ADAPTER
A small device that connects a 2-wire
300 ohm antenna to a 75 ohm RF jack.
It is usually about an inch long with two
screws on one end and a round opening
with a wire extending out the other end.
A/V CABLES
Audio/Video cables. Three cables
bunched together—right audio (red), left
audio (white), and video (yellow). A/V
cables are used for stereo playback of
videocassettes and for higher quality picture and sound from other A/V devices.
COMPOSITE VIDEO
Typical video jack, uses one wire for
transporting three-color video signals.
DELETE
Lets you remove channels from the list
that the end user can scroll through using Channel Up/Down.
DIGITAL TELEVISION
High-resolution, cinema-quality television
signals transmitted digitally.
DVI
Digital Video Interface. Accommodates
analog and digital interfaces with a
single connector.
HDMI
High-definition multi-media interface.
A/V DEVICE
Any device that produces video or sound
(VCR, DVD, cable box, or television).
HDSTB
High-definition set top box. Refers to a
tuner device that receives high-definition
television signals which have higher resolution than ordinary analog TV signals.
AMPLIFIER
An electronic device that amplifies sound
from a television, CD player, VCR, DVD
player, or other Audio/Video device.
HDTV
High-definition television. Refers to television signals that have higher resolution than ordinary analog TV signals.
ANTENNA
The physical receiver of television signals sent over the air. A large metal piece
of equipment does not always have to be
visible to be using an antenna.
INPUT
Refers to the input jack that receives a
signal from a TV, VCR, DVD Player or
other Audio/Video device.
b-LAN
Licensed proprietary RF communication
system used to configure/control TV via
RF distribution system.
CABLE
Cable service box. Refers to the descrambler box cable subscribers use to
receive cable programming signals.
CATV
Programming provided by a cable
service.
JACK
An input or output connector on the
back of a TV, VCR, DVD Player or other
Audio/Video device.
MONO SOUND
Mono (monaural) sound is one channel
of sound. On more than one speaker, all
the speakers play the same audio.
OUTPUT
Refers to the output jack that sends a
signal out of a VCR, DVD, or other A/V
device.
PHYSICAL CHANNEL NUMBER
The actual channel number. Analog
channels use the Physical Channel
number and digital channels can use a
Virtual Channel number.
RGB (RED, GREEN, BLUE)
Connection input or output port available for producing a video image using
three separate colors: Red, Green, and
Blue.
RS-232
Serial communication port through
which firmware is downloaded.
2ND AUDIO PROGRAMMING/SAP
Second Audio Programming (SAP) is
another, separate audio channel available with some programming. Choosing
SAP often refers to listening to audio in
another language, such as Spanish or
French.
SIGNAL
Picture and sound traveling through a
cable, or over the air, to the TV.
STEREO SOUND
Stereo (Stereophonic) sound refers to
audio that’s divided into right and left
sides.
TUNER
Device that picks up the broadcast signal and turns it into picture and sound.
VIRTUAL CHANNEL NUMBER
A re-mapped channel number. Analog
channels use the Physical Channel
number; however digital channels use a
Virtual (or false) Channel number.
XDS
Extended Data Service. Additional
program information included on the
signal provided at the discretion of the
broadcaster.
Note: Refer to www.atsc.org for further
information.
COMPONENT VIDEO
Uses three wires for transporting threecolor video signals. The end result is
usually better video quality.
206-4163
45
Document Revision History / Notes
Document Revision History
Date
Description
December 2010
Revision A: New Document
January 2011
Revision B: Includes LD325H TVs
Product documentation is available online at: www.LGsolutions.com/products. From the Products page,
select TVs, Systems & Solutions, then LCD TVs, then the applicable TV. Click the Literature & Downloads
tab at the bottom of the TV page, and select the required document(s) from the Downloads list.
Notes
46
206-4163
For Customer Support/Service, please call:­­
1-888-865-3026
www.LGsolutions.com
Pro:Idiom is a registered trademark of Zenith Electronics LLC. Pro:Centric is a trademark of LG
Electronics U.S.A., Inc. b-LAN is a trademark of LodgeNet Interactive Corporation. All other
trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© Copyright 2011, LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
206-4163
Revision B
32LD310H
37LD310H
Lodging Guest Interactive Pro:Centric™ TVs
Commercial Mode Setup Guide
Note: Selected features shown in this guide may not be available on all models.
EXPERIENCED INSTALLER
Commercial Mode Setup
pages 12 – 13
Cloning Information
pages 23 – 28
FTG Mode of Operation
pages 29 – 36
© Copyright 2011, LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
P/N: 206-4177 (Rev A)
For Customer Support/Service, please call:
1-888-865-3026
The latest product information and documentation is
available online at:
www.LGsolutions.com/products
MODEL and SERIAL NUMBER
The model and serial numbers of this TV are located on the
back of the cabinet. For future reference, LG suggests that
you record those numbers here:
Model No._________________Serial No. _______________
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USERSERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
POWER CORD POLARIZATION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounding-type alternating current power plug. This plug will fit into the power
outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the 3-wire grounding-type plug.
NOTE TO CABLE/TV INSTALLER:
This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the National Electric
Code (U.S.A.). The code provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground
shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of the cable entry as practical.
REGULATORY INFORMATION:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION:
Do not attempt to modify this product in any way without written authorization from LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
Unauthorized modification could void the user’s authority to operate this product.
COMPLIANCE:
The responsible party for this product’s compliance is: LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
1000 Sylvan Avenue, Englewood Cliffs, NJ 07632, USA • Phone: 1-201-816-2000
Marketed and Distributed in the United States by LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
1000 Sylvan Avenue, Englewood Cliffs, NJ 07632
2
© Copyright 2011, LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
206-4177
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Read these instructions.
2.
Keep these instructions.
3.
Heed all warnings.
4.
Follow all instructions.
5.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
6.
Clean only with dry cloth.
7.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8.
Do not install near any heat sources, such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched,
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where it exits from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination in order to avoid injury from tipover.
17. Power Cord
Caution: It is recommended that appliances be placed
upon a dedicated circuit; that is, a single outlet circuit
which powers only that appliance and has no additional
outlets or branch circuits. Check the specification page
of the Owner’s Manual to be certain.
Periodically examine the cord of your appliance, and if its
appearance indicates damage or deterioration, unplug it,
discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord replaced
with an exact replacement part by an authorized servicer.
Protect the power cord from physical or mechanical abuse,
such as twisting, kinking, or pinching or being closed in a
door or walked upon. Pay particular attention to plugs, wall
outlets, and the point where the cord exits the appliance.
Do not use a damaged or loose power cord. Be sure to grasp
the plug when unplugging the power cord. Do not pull on the
power cord to unplug the TV.
18. Overloading
Do not connect too many appliances to the same AC power
outlet as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not
overload wall outlets. Overloaded wall outlets, loose or damaged wall outlets, extension cords, frayed power cords, or
damaged or cracked wire insulation are dangerous. Any of
these conditions could result in fire or electric shock.
19. Outdoor Use/Wet Location
Warning: To reduce the risk of fire or electrical
shock, do not expose this product to rain,
moisture or other liquids.
Do not touch the TV with wet hands. Do not install this product
near flammable objects such as gasoline or candles or expose
the TV to direct air conditioning.
Do not expose to dripping or splashing and do not place
objects filled with liquids, such as vases, cups, etc., on or over
the apparatus (e.g., on shelves above the unit).
PORTABLE CART WARNING
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
14. Never touch this apparatus or antenna during a thunder or
lighting storm.
15. When mounting a TV on the wall, make sure not to install
the TV by the hanging power and signal cables on the back
of the TV.
16. Do not allow an impact shock or any objects to fall into the
product, and do not drop objects onto the screen.
206-4177
20. Grounding
Ensure that you connect the earth ground wire to prevent
possible electric shock (i.e., a TV with a three-prong grounded AC plug must be connected to a three-prong grounded
AC outlet). If grounding methods are not possible, have a
qualified electrician install a separate circuit breaker. Do not
try to ground the unit by connecting it to telephone wires,
lightening rods, or gas pipes.
21. Disconnect Device
The mains plug is the disconnecting device. The plug must
remain readily operable.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is
not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn
off this unit by SWITCH.
(Continued on next page)
3
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(Continued from previous page)
22. Outdoor Antenna Grounding
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the
product, follow the precautions below.
An outdoor antenna system should not be located in the
vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or
power circuits or where it can come into contact with such
power lines or circuits as death or serious injury can occur.
Be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide
some protection against voltage surges and built-up static
charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) in the
U.S.A. provides information with respect to proper grounding
of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the leadin wire to an antenna-discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
Antenna Grounding According to NEC, ANSI/NFPA 70
Ground Clamp
Antenna Lead in Wire
Antenna Discharge Unit
(NEC Section 810-20)
Electric Service
Equipment
Grounding Conductor
(NEC Section 810-21)
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding
Electrode System (NEC
Art 250, Part H)
27. If you smell smoke or other odors coming from the TV or
hear strange sounds, unplug the power cord, and contact
an authorized service center.
28. Do not press strongly on the panel with a hand or sharp
object (e.g., a nail, pencil, or pen) or make a scratch on it.
29. Keep the product away from direct sunlight.
30. Dot Defect
The Plasma or LCD panel is a high technology product with
resolution of two million to six million pixels. In a very few
cases, you could see fine dots on the screen while you’re
viewing the TV. Those dots are deactivated pixels and do not
affect the performance and reliability of the TV.
31. Generated Sound
“Cracking”: A cracking noise that occurs while the TV is On or
when it is turned Off is generated by plastic thermal contraction due to temperature and humidity. This noise is common
for products where thermal deformation is required.
Electrical circuit humming/panel buzzing: A low level noise is
generated from a high-speed switching circuit, which supplies a large amount of current to operate a product. It varies
depending on the product. This generated sound does not
affect the performance and reliability of the product.
32. For LCD TV
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a small “flicker”
when it is turned On. This is normal; there is nothing wrong
with TV. Some minute dot defects may be visible on the
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue spots. However,
they have no adverse effect on the monitor’s performance.
Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your finger(s)
against it for long periods of time. Doing so may produce
some temporary distortion effects on the screen.
23. Cleaning
When cleaning, unplug the power cord and rub gently with a
soft cloth to prevent scratching. Do not spray water or other
liquids directly on the TV as electric shock may occur. Do not
clean with chemicals such as alcohol, thinners or benzene.
24. Transporting Product
Make sure the product is turned Off and unplugged and that
all cables have been removed. It may take two or more people to carry larger TVs. Do not press against or put stress on
the front panel of the TV.
25. Ventilation
Install the TV where there is proper ventilation. Do not install
in a confined space such as a bookcase. Do not cover the
product with cloth or other materials (e.g., plastic) while it is
plugged in. Do not install in excessively dusty places.
26. Do not touch the ventilation openings, as they may become
hot while the TV is operating.
4
206-4177
Table of Contents
Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Teaching FMA Configuration to a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 – 4
Learning an FMA Configuration File from a TV . . . . 31
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Optional Manual Configuration / Setup for a TV. . . . 32
Setup Checklist / Commercial Mode Setup Overview . . 6
FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility Overview. . . 33
Pro:Centric TV Interactive Menu Features. . . . . . . . . . . 7
FTG Channel Map Editor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
LD310H Rear Jack Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
FTG Installer Menu Configuration Utility Overview. . 35
Side Connections Panel / RF Antenna & MPI
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FMA Configuration Utility Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installer Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
References
Installer Remote Control Typical Key Functions . . . . . 11
Upgrading TV/PTC Software using a USB Memory
Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Commercial Mode Setup for Master TV . . . . . . . 12 – 13
Installer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 – 20
TV Setup Menus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Adding Channel Icons / Custom Channel Labels
(2-5-4 + MENU Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Cloning Overview / Clonable Menu Features . . . . . 23
Downloading a Splash Screen using a USB Memory
Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Power Consumption Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TV Camport Auto Sense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TV Aux Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cloning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 – 28
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 – 45
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using
a USB Memory Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
General Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using
a TLL-1100A Clone Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 – 26
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using
an LT2002 Clone Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 – 28
Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Commercial Mode Check / FTG Operation
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Clone Programmer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
FTG Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 – 36
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
FTG Mode Overview / Determining the TV
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Document Revision History / Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Creating an FMA Configuration File using the FTG
Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Back Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Notes
• Installer Menu content is intended for use primarily by qualified TV electronics technicians.
• Refer to the Owner’s Manual for additional information on TV features, specifications, maintenance, and safety instructions.
• For additional information, contact your LG representative.
For Customer Support/Service, please call:
1-888-865-3026
www.LGsolutions.com
Note: Design and specifications subject to change without prior notice.
206-4177
5
Setup Checklist / Commercial Mode Setup Overview
Setup Checklist
Installation and Setup Checklist
__ Unpack TV and all accessories.
__ Install batteries in remote control.
__ Install TV on VESA mount or stand.
Note: It may be advisable to make all cable
connections before installing on VESA mount or
stand, as appropriate.
Hardware Connections
__ Install any additional hardware as
appropriate to your institution, LAN, etc.
Commercial Mode Setup
__ Complete Commercial Mode Setup (configure
all relevant Installer Menu items as required of
your institution and configure display features
for the end user).
Software Installation
__ Install or configure any software, as applicable,
for example, PPV, etc.
Cable Connections
__ Make all connections to rear jack panel and RF
antenna on MPI/PPV card.
__ Make all connections to signal, interactive
resources, and Aux sources, as appropriate.
Commercial Mode Setup Overview
This document describes how to set up LD310H Pro:Centric™ TVs for Commercial Mode either while in
Pass-through Mode or Free-To-Guest (FTG) Mode.
Pass-through Mode
This mode allows you to configure a Master TV Setup for cloning purposes as well as external VOD/PPV
control. Use the Installer Remote to configure Installer Menu items as required for TV operation and set up
TV features (Channel, Picture, Audio, etc.). See pages 12 to 13 for detailed information.
FTG Mode
This mode enables Pro:Idiom ® decryption and also allows logical channel mapping of physical channels
to remove the need for dash tuning. FTG Configuration Application software is used to configure and/or
edit FTG Channel Map and FTG Installer Menu settings. See pages 29 to 36 for basic information on FTG
Mode and using a PC with the FTG Configuration Application to create an FMA Configuration file. Refer to
the Free-To-Guest (FTG) Configuration Application manual for further details.
6
206-4177
Pro:Centric TV Interactive Menu Features
Channel Guide
Information
Remote Help
Watch TV
Important: Pro:Centric operation requires that Installer Menu items 098
PRO:CENTRIC and 119 DATA CHANNEL be set appropriately and that the TV be
in PPV or FTG Mode.
The interactive Pro:Centric TV enables guests—from the comfort of their hotel
rooms—to view and select from a complete listing of hotel services and amenities.
The Pro:Centric TV is connected to the hotel's billing computer, and service/amenities
charges are billed at the time of order.
Interactive amenities may include:
• Hotel information, news, and events
• Directory services (tourist attractions, restaurants, etc.)
• Reservation services (business meetings, fitness, spa, etc.)
• Weather and traffic information
ALARM TIMER
• Shopping services (delivery to guest room)
INPUT
TV
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
INFO
VOL
3
6
9
• Ticketing services
• Check-out service (in the guest room)
• Gaming services
• E-mail resources/account access
FLASHBK
i
PORTAL
CH
MUTE
MENU
• Room service (menu ordering, memo service, morning wake up call, laundry, etc.)
GUIDE
CC
P
A
G
E
Use the Installer Remote to operate both interactive menus and regular TV features.
Press PORTAL on the Installer Remote to access the interactive menus.
Note: Interactive menu options may vary, depending on Pro:Centric features enabled
for the site. The following are default interactive menus.
Channel Guide
ENTER
RETURN
SAP
Shows available TV networks and channels. When available, Electronic Program
Guide (EPG) data indicates the channel and the program start and finish times.
EXIT
EJECT
RATIO
Information
Typically displays hotel information, for example, photos of guest rooms, dining rooms,
business centers, fitness and pool facilities, etc. Information may also include resources, such as local school programs, run in cooperation with the hotel.
Remote Help
Provides help for navigating the interactive menus.
Watch TV
Removes the interactive menu from the screen and returns to the previously tuned TV
channel.
206-4177
7
LD310H Rear Jack Panel
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
Audio connection for
RGB or DVI device.
UPDATE
Restricted to
software updates.
REMOTE CONTROL OUT
IR output for controlling an
auxiliary device.
RESET
Press RESET to
re-initialize the TV.
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RESET
UPDATE
HDMI
2
..........
HDMI
/DVI IN
1
..........
.....
....
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
.....
.....
.....
AV IN 1
VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB IN (PC)
SPEAKER
OUT ( 8 )
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
AUDIO
R
RS-232C IN
Use for downloading
software updates, etc.
AUDIO/VIDEO IN 1
Connection for composite
audio/video output from
external device.
COMPONENT IN
HDMI/DVI IN
Connection for HDMI/DVI
output from external device.
RGB IN (PC)
Connection for RGB
output from PC.
COMPONENT IN
Connection for component
output from external device.
SPEAKER OUT (8Ω) *
Connect to 8 ohm self-powered
speaker input. Intended for special
applications, such as a powered bathroom speaker with volume control.
* This stereo jack provides a mono speaker
fixed-level, 1 watt output (audio +, audio -,
w/ground shield). Do NOT plug in a mono
connector, as this may damage the TV.
8
206-4177
Side Connections Panel / RF Antenna & MPI Connections
A/V 2 Input
L/MONO-AUDIO-R IN
Connect to audio output jacks
on external device. For only
mono audio output, connect to
Left audio input.
VIDEO L/MONO -AUDIO- R
USB IN
Insert USB memory device for
software updates, cloning purposes, or picture/music entertainment, as applicable.
USB IN
Side Connections Panel
VIDEO IN
Connect to video output port on
external device (see Reference
section, “TV Camport Auto Sense
Operation,” for further information).
AV IN 2
RF Antenna & MPI Connections
Antenna
or CATV
ANTENNA IN
MP I
206-4177
ANTENNA IN
Connect to
Antenna/CATV.
MPI
Enables an external MPI control
device (i.e., clone programmer, VOD/
PPV STB, etc.) to control the TV.
9
Installer Overview
This is the Commercial Mode Setup Guide only.
Installer Menu / Commercial Mode Setup
xxLD310H PTC INSTALLER MENU
To set up a Master TV for cloning purposes, you will need to know how
to enter the TV Installer Menu and make changes to the default values
as required. Similarly, to configure a TV’s Installer Menu settings in FTG
Mode, you will need to know how to access and use the FTG
Configuration Application utilities. If necessary, familiarize yourself with
the Installer Menu and how to make and save changes. Refer to page 14
for information on accessing the Installer Menu in Pass-through Mode.
Pages 15 to 20 describe Installer Menu items in detail. Refer to pages 29
to 36 for information on entering FTG Mode and using the FTG
Configuration Application utilities.
000 INSTALLER SEQ
000
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.001
ASIC 20E7
CPU V3.25.00
Typical Installer Menu
Installer Remote
The LG Installer Remote is supplied with and dedicated to operate the
TV. See next page for typical key functions in TV operating mode. Some
DVD and VCR controls may be available for selected LG DVD/VCR
products.
Cloning
Cloning refers to the process of capturing a Master TV Setup and transferring it to a Target TV. The Master TV’s clonable features need to be
configured as part of the Commercial Mode Setup. This is a critical step.
If the Master TV’s clonable features—channel icons or labels, digital font
options, etc.—are not set up correctly, the cloned TVs will all have problems. Pages 23 to 28 provide detailed information on cloning requirements and procedures.
ALARM TIMER
INPUT
TV
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
INFO
3
6
9
FLASHBK
i
VOL
PORTAL
MENU
GUIDE
CH
P
A
G
E
MUTE
CC
ENTER
+
A
AA
A
AA
+
Installing Batteries in Installer
Remote
• Open the battery compartment cover on the back side of the remote.
• Install two high-quality alkaline 1.5V AAA batteries. Never mix old
or used batteries with new ones. Install batteries matching correct
polarity as shown (+ with + and - with -).
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
10
RETURN
SAP
EXIT
EJECT
RATIO
206-4177
Installer Remote Control Typical Key Functions
The LG Installer Remote illustrated below and throughout this document shows typical remote control functions and
is provided for reference only. This Installer Remote may vary from the Installer Remote supplied with the TV.
POWER
Turns TV ON or OFF.
ALARM
Sets the time when the TV
will automatically turn itself ON.
TIMER
Sets the amount of time before the TV
automatically turns itself OFF.
INPUT
Selects RGB, HDMI/DVI1, HDMI2,
Component Input, AV1, and AV2 sources.
TV
Returns to the last TV channel (from an
Aux input).
ALARM TIMER
PORTAL
Displays and removes the interactive
menu.
MUTE
Switches sound ON or OFF.
NUMBER Buttons (0 - 9) DASH
Use to enter a program number or channel.
Dash is used for sub-channel numbers such
as 2-1, 2-2, 9-1, 9-2, 100-3, 100-4, etc.
TV
1
4
7
VOLUME UP/DOWN
Increases/decreases sound level.
INFO
Displays channel information.
INPUT
2
5
8
0
INFO
VOL
3
6
9
FLASHBK (FLASHBACK)
Returns to the previously tuned channel.
Arrows (Up/Down/Left/Right) & ENTER
Use to navigate on-screen menus and
adjust TV settings to your requirements.
MENU
Displays the TV setup menus on the screen.
Also exits the on-screen menu system and
returns to TV viewing.
FLASHBK
GUIDE
Displays and removes the electronic
program guide.
i
PORTAL
CH
P
A
G
E
MUTE
MENU
CHANNEL/PAGE UP/DOWN
Changes the channel. Moves from one
full set of screen information to the
next.
GUIDE
CC
Press to activate subtitles.
CC
RETURN
Returns one level to the previous menu/
display.
ENTER
RETURN
SAP
SAP
Analog Mode: Selects MTS sound (Mono,
Stereo, or SAP). DTV Mode: Changes
audio language, if additional languages are
available. *
EXIT
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to
TV viewing.
Color buttons access special functions
in some menus.
VCR/DVD BUTTONS
Controls some video cassette
recorders or DVD players.
EJECT
Ejects a USB memory device, CD,
DVD, VHS tape, as applicable.
RATIO
Adjusts the picture aspect ratio.
EJECT
RATIO
* SAP notes:
•
•
•
206-4177
If SAP is selected and no SAP is provided, sound
may not be heard on channel.
Each analog channel may have its own SAP setting.
Digital channels will reset to default audio language
with a power off/on.
11
Commercial Mode Setup for Master TV
This section describes how to set up a Master TV for cloning purposes when the TV is in Pass-through Mode.
Note: Disconnect all Aux inputs. Under certain conditions, Auto Tuning (Channel Search) is disabled if
there is an Aux input active.
Note: Refer to “FTG Mode of Operation” on pages 29 to 36 for information on entering FTG Mode and
configuring/editing FTG Channel Map and Installer Menu settings using the FTG Configuration Application.
1. Set Installer Menu items.
This step provides specific instruction only on the Installer Menu
items that should be set on a Master TV. Refer to pages 14 to 20
for detailed information on all Installer Menu items.
a) Make sure the TV is ON. Then, use the Installer Remote to
enter the TV Installer Menu: Press MENU repeatedly until
the on-screen setup menus lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 +
ENTER.
b) Set Installer Menu item 117 FACT DEFAULT to 001 and press
ENTER on the Installer Remote.
This clears all Installer Menu custom settings, the channel
lineup, etc. and reloads the factory default settings. The value
will change back to 0 after the internal TV controller (Protocol
Translator Card [PTC]) has been restored to factory default
condition. This step ensures that the TV Channel Memory will
be the active channel lineup.
c) Set Installer Menu item 003 BAND/AFC, as appropriate.
• Broadcast: Set to 000.
• HRC: Set to 002.
• CATV: Set to 001 (default).
• IRC: Set to 003.
xxLD310H PTC INSTALLER MENU
000 INSTALLER SEQ
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.001
000
ASIC 20E7
CPU V3.25.00
Typical TV Installer Menu
Note: The Installer Menu header will vary
depending on the TV you are setting up.
117
FACT DEFAULT
001
003
BAND/AFC
00X
Adjust the settings for these
Installer Menu items.
d) Set any other Installer Menu items that affect your TV programming network to the required configuration. For example, enable/
disable Aux sources, set a Start Channel, etc.
e) After you have adjusted all required Installer Menu item
settings, press ENTER once on the Installer Remote to save
your changes; then, press ENTER again to exit the menu.
2. Set up TV features.
On-screen setup menus control the features of the TV (see page
21). Press MENU on the Installer Remote to access the setup
menus, and then set Channel, Picture, Audio, Lock, Time, etc.
options to the desired configurations. See also the Clonable Menu
Features list on page 23.
Note: If desired, you can run Auto Tuning (see step 3) prior to
completing this step.
CHANNEL
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
OPTION
INPUT
MY MEDIA
Set the TV features to the desired
configuration for the end user.
(Continued on next page)
12
206-4177
Commercial Mode Setup for Master TV (Cont.)
(Continued from previous page)
3. Run Auto Tuning (Channel Search).
a) Search for all available analog and digital channels: Go to the
Channel Menu, select the Auto Tuning option, and follow the
on-screen instructions.
b) Use the Channel Edit option in the Channel Menu to edit the
channel lineup, as necessary, to include free to guest channels
only.
• Add/delete channels per your system requirements. Note that
physical channel numbers are used to identify virtual channels.
Also, channel numbers cannot be higher than 255.
• Use the Channel Label option in the Channel Menu to add
familiar channel trademarks/logos such as ABC, CBS, NBC,
etc. to the Channel-Time on-screen display. Identifiable labels
(logos) should enable the end user to readily know what common networks are available. (You can add the channel labels
in this step, or you can add channel labels or logos for channels
without icons in step 5.)
4. Transfer the TV Setup to the internal TV Controller (PTC):
2-5-5 + MENU Mode
After the TV channel lineup has been edited and channel label icons
added, enter the Installer Menu. Once in the Installer Menu, press
2-5-5 + MENU on the Installer Remote to initiate the transfer of the
Master TV Setup to the PTC. The TV exits the Installer Menu and
then tunes through the channels in the channel lineup during the
transfer. When the transfer is complete, the TV tunes back to the
channel that was tuned before the transfer began.
CHANNEL
Move
Enter
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Channel Edit
Channel Label
Run Auto Tuning, edit channels, and select
familiar channel trademarks/logos using
Channel Menu options.
19-3
DIGITAL
MONO STEREO
SAP
WXYZ
Custom Text Label “WXYZ” created in
2-5-4 + MENU (Add Channel Label) Mode.
Note: The maximum number of active channels that can be transferred is 141. Total channels numbering more than 141 will result in
erratic TV operation.
5. Add Custom Channel and Aux Source Labels for Analog
Channels: 2-5-4 + MENU Mode
Enter the Installer Menu, and press 2-5-4 + MENU on the Installer
Remote. Add/edit custom text labels to channel on-screen displays.
Note that digital channels often have a broadcaster generated label
(see 2-5-4 + MENU procedural information on page 22). When you
are finished, press MENU to exit 2-5-4 + MENU Mode.
028
CH. OVERIDE
000
After verifying the TV Setup, set Installer
Menu item 028 CH. OVERIDE to 000.*
* This step prevents end users from
accessing channel settings (i.e., the
Channel Menu will be inaccessible/
grayed out).
6. Verify the TV setup.
At this point, verify that the channel lineup, channel icons, and custom labels
are correct. Make sure the TV features are set per your requirements.
7. Lock the channel lineup.
Enter the Installer Menu. Set item 028 CH. OVERIDE to 000 and press ENTER
to lock the channel lineup and restrict access to the TV setup menus. Press
ENTER again to save your changes and exit the Installer Menu.*
The Master TV Setup is now ready to be copied to a USB memory device or a clone
programmer (see cloning information in this document).
206-4177
13
Installer Menu
Use the Installer Menu to set up or change operational settings.
Refer to the table starting on the next page for brief descriptions of Installer Menu
items. More detailed descriptions follow the table listing.
Accessing the Installer Menu
1. Make sure the TV is ON.
2. Using an Installer Remote, press MENU repeatedly until the on-screen
setup menus lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 + ENTER to access the
Installer Menu.
The Installer Menu opens with item 000 INSTALLER SEQ 000.
Using the Installer Menu
Items 000 ~ 119 are accessible only upon entering the Installer
Menu. Refer to the table on pages 15 and 16 for an overview of Installer
Menu items, including item numbers, functions, ranges, and default values.
Installer Menu items not relevant to this TV series are not present on the
Installer Menu; therefore, some numbers are missing. For example, item 006
will not appear.
xxLD310H PTC INSTALLER MENU
000 INSTALLER SEQ
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.001
000
ASIC 20E7
CPU V3.25.00
Typical TV Installer Menu
Navigation within the Installer Menu
Use the Up/Down arrow keys on the Installer Remote to sequence through
the available menu items, or access an item directly by keying in the line
number and then pressing MENU. For example, to access the SLEEP TIMER
option, which is item 015, press 0-1-5 + MENU.
Changing Installer Menu Settings
To change an Installer Menu item setting, use the Left/Right arrow keys on
the Installer Remote, or enter a value directly. Press ENTER to save the new
setting, or use the Up/Down arrow keys to navigate to a new Installer Menu
item if you have additional items to edit.
Exiting the Installer Menu and Activating Updates
After you have adjusted all required Installer Menu item settings, press
ENTER once on the Installer Remote to save your changes; then, press
ENTER again to exit the Installer Menu. Any changes you make will be
stored in non-volatile memory.
14
206-4177
Installer Menu (Cont.)
Installer Menu Items 000 through 071
Menu
Item
Function
Value Range
Default Value
Brief Description of Function and Comments
000
INSTALLER SEQ
0~3
0
Leave default set to 0.
001
POWER MANAGE
0~7
0
Sets number of hours of no activity before automatic shutoff.
002
AC ON
0/1
0
Set to 1 to enable Auto Turn ON when AC power is applied.
003
BAND/AFC
0~3
1
Selects Tuning Band: 0=Broadcast, 1=CATV, 2=HRC, 3=IRC
0 ~ 127, 255
255
Channel tuned when TV is turned ON. (Set to 255 to tune to channel
tuned before TV turned OFF.)
0/1
0
If set to 1, cannot tune from current channel.
0 ~ 63, 255
255
Volume level when TV is turned ON. (Set to 255 to use volume level
before TV turned OFF.)
004
STRT CHANNEL
005
CHAN LOCK
007
STRT VOLUME
008
MIN VOLUME
0 ~ 63
0
Sets minimum allowable volume setting.
009
MAX VOLUME
0 ~ 63
63
Sets maximum allowable volume setting.
010
MUTE DISABLE
0/1
0
Set to 1 to disable Mute Function.
011
KEY DEFEAT
0/1
0
Set to 1 to disable menu navigation keys on display panel.
015
SLEEP TIMER
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable Sleep Timer.
016
EN TIMER
0/1
0
Set to 1 to enable On/Off Timers.
017
ALARM
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable Alarm.
020
FEATURE LEVEL
0 ~ 1, 16 ~ 24
1
Determines the IR code scheme to which the TV will respond.
021
V-CHIP
022
MAX BLK HRS
023
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable V-Chip (Parental Control) functions.
0 ~ 99
12
Sets number of V-Chip blocking hours.
CAPTION LOCK
0/1
0
Set to 1 to retain caption setting set before TV turned OFF.
028
CH. OVERIDE
0/1
1
If set to 0, limits direct access to favorite channels.
029
OLD OCV
0/1
0
Set to 1 to change MPI operation to OCV.
030
ACK MASK
0/1
0
If set to 1, changes MPI for some OCV boxes.
031
POLL RATE
20 ~ 169
94
Selects poll rate for MPI.
032
TIMING PULSE
186 ~ 227
207
Sets baud rate for MPI.
034
CAMPORT EN
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable Video 2 input.
035
COMPPORT EN.
0/1
1
Set to 0 to disable HDMI 1. Set to 1 enable HDMI 1.
038
YPrPb EN.
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable display panel Component Video 1 input jacks.
039
REAR AUX EN
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable display panel Video 1 input jack.
040
AUTO CAMPORT
0/1
1
Set to 1 to automatically switch to Camport. If set to 1, STRT AUX SRCE
cannot be set to 2.
046
STRT AUX SRCE
1 ~ 6, 255
6
Sets the starting Aux source (if item 004 STRT CHANNEL is set to 0).
047
AUX STATUS
0/1
0
Set to 1 for MPI Aux source to be reported as a channel number instead of
Channel 0.
053
DIS. CH-TIME
0/1
0
Set to 1 to disable Channel-Time display.
069
EN. CH-T COL.
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable custom color for the Channel-Time display.
070
FOR. CH-TIME
0~7
2
Chooses custom foreground color for the Channel-Time display.
071
BCK. CH-TIME
0~7
2
Chooses custom background color for the Channel-Time display.
206-4177
15
Installer Menu (Cont.)
Installer Menu Items 073 through 119
Menu
Item
16
Function
Value Range
Default Value
Brief Description of Function and Comments
073
CH NOT AVBLE
0/1
0
If set to 1 and Channel Override is 0, “NOT AVAILABLE” message is displayed
when directly accessing a channel not in the favorite Channel List.
075
REVERT CH
0/1
0
If set to 1 and loss of MPI communication occurs, TV tunes to Start Channel.
078
UPN MSB
0 ~ 255
0
User programmable number, most significant byte.
079
UPN MSB-1
0 ~ 255
0
User programmable number, most significant byte - 1.
080
UPN MSB-2
0 ~ 255
0
User programmable number, most significant byte - 2.
081
UPN LSB
0 ~ 255
0
User programmable number, least significant byte.
082
CHKSM ERROR
0/1
1
Enforces rigid MPI checksum.
083
HANDSHK TIME
0~5
5
Relaxes MPI timing to be compatible with PC-based Windowscontrolled systems.
084
PERMANENT BLK
0/1
0
Removes block hours setting for Parental Control and makes block permanent.
087
REAR RGB EN.
0 / 1 / 17
1
Set to 0 to disable RGB1. Set to 1 to enable for RGB PC. Set to 17
for Auto Configure.
088
EN NOISE MUTE
0/1
1
If set to 1, audio is muted if no signal is present.
090
KEY LOCK
0/1
0
If set to 1, keyboard is locked out, IR is still functional.
091
YPrPb2 EN
0/1
1
Set to 1 to enable HDMI 2 input.
094
SAP MENU EN
0/1
1
Set to 0 to disable feature on Function Menu. Set to 1 to enable feature on
Function Menu.
096
DEF. ASP. RATIO
0~4
2
Sets default aspect ratio at power up. See detailed descriptions and item 106.
098
PRO:CENTRIC
0~2
0
Set to 0 to disable Pro:Centric operation. Set to 1 for Flash Mode. Set to 2 for
GEM (Java Application) Mode.
099
BACK LIGHTING
1 ~ 100,
101 ~ 200, 255
100
Sets the level of the TV picture back lighting. (See detailed descriptions.)
102
ATSC BAND
0~4
4
Selects ATSC band.
103
ATSC TUNE MODE
0/1
1
Set to 1 (default) for Physical Channel scan. Set to 0 for Virtual Channel scan.
104
START MINOR CH
0 ~ 255
0
Selects Minor Start Channel. Set to 0 for NTSC.
106
ASP RATIO LOCK
0/1
0
To retain set aspect ratio on power cycle, set to 1. Set to 0 for default ratio on
power cycle.
116
VIDEO MUTE EN
0/1
0
Set to 0 for Normal. Set to 1 for Blank.
117
FACT DEFAULT
0/1
0
Set to 0 for Normal. Set to 1 to load presets for all Installer Menu settings.
119
DATA CHANNEL
0 ~ 135
0
Set to 0 to disable. Set to the RF channel number of the Data Channel for
Pro:Centric or E-Z Installation data. (See detailed descriptions.)
206-4177
Installer Menu (Cont.)
Detailed Descriptions of Installer Menu Items
000 - INSTALLER SEQUENCE
Specifies entry sequence to the Installer Menu.
0 = 9876
2 = 1478
To translate a TV volume level to the Installer Menu value, use
the following formula:
1 = 4321
3 = 3698
001 - POWER MANAGE (Power Management)
Determines hours of no activity before automatic shutoff. The
Power Management function is for saving energy. If set to 0,
Power Manage is Off. Settings range from 0 ~ 7, with 1 ~ 7 representing the hours that the unit will remain ON, unless there has
been activity from either the control panel or remote control.
002 - AC ON (AC Power Switchable)
If set to 1, this allows the TV to turn ON when AC power is applied. Pressing the ON button is not necessary. This is desirable
if the TV is plugged into a cable box or a power outlet controlled
by a wall switch. Use the Left/Right arrow keys to choose 0 or 1,
where 0 is the default (OFF), and 1 is ON.
Note: If set to 1 (ON), the TV does not respond to On/Off commands from either the remote or the display control panel, and the
SLEEP TIMER is also nonfunctional.
003 - BAND/AFC (Band/Automatic Frequency Control)
There are four possible settings for this option:
0 = Broadcast
2 = HRC
NOTE: For items 007, 008, and 009
For legacy reasons, the scale used is 0 – 63. The PTC software
will translate this to the 0 – 100 scale used by the TV.
1 = CATV (default)
3 = IRC
If some channels were not found by Auto Tuning (Channel
Search), select the appropriate Band setting here, and add the
channels using the Channel Edit option in the Channel Menu.
Installer Value = TV Value x 63
100
Enter only the whole number (disregard fractions).
007 - STRT VOLUME (Start Volume)
This function allows the Installer to determine the initial volume
level setting when the TV is turned ON. This feature is useful
for an in-house information channel, since the TV would always
select that volume level when it is turned ON. The range of values
are 0 - 63, 255. If 255 is selected, the current volume level will be
retained in memory when the TV is turned OFF; at turn ON, the
volume level will be automatically set at the previous or last level.
008 - MIN VOLUME (Minimum Volume)
This function determines the minimum volume level allowable
with the Volume (VOL) Up/Down control. In this way, for example,
someone cannot set the volume too low to hear. The value range
is from 0 to 63. Use the Left/Right arrow keys to change values.
The factory default is 0, which provides the full range of volume
control, if item 009 MAX VOLUME is also set to 63. It may be best
to set the same value on every TV.
Note: The minimum volume level cannot have a value setting
higher than the maximum volume level (described below).
004 - STRT CHANNEL (Start Channel)
If active, this function allows you to determine the initial Major
Start Channel number when the TV is turned ON. This feature is
useful for an in-house information channel, since the TV would always select that channel when it is turned ON. Setting this item to
255 causes the last channel viewed when the TV was turned OFF,
to be the tuned to channel when the TV is turned ON again.
009 - MAX VOLUME (Maximum Volume)
This function determines the maximum volume level allowable
with the Volume (VOL) Up/Down control. In this way, for example,
someone cannot set the volume level high enough to disturb others. The value range is 0 to 63, with 63 as the default, which gives
the user the full range of volume control, if item 008 MIN VOLUME
is also set at 0. Use the Left/Right arrow keys to change values. It
may be best to set the same value on every TV.
Note: For a digital Start Channel, always remember to set item
104 to the Minor Start Channel number.
Note: The maximum volume level cannot have a value setting
lower than the minimum volume level (described above).
255 = Last channel
126 = Map to Channel 3
010 - MUTE DISABLE
Enables or disables sound mute function. If set to 1, sound cannot
be muted. If set to 0, sound can be muted.
1 ~ 125 = Major Ch. #
127 = Map to Channel 4
0 = Aux
005 - CHAN LOCK (Channel Lock)
Channel Lock is ideal if the system must always be on the same
channel. Changing channels with the Channel Up/Down or keypad numbers is impossible. Channel Lock is inactive if set to 0
(default).
Generally, this feature is used in connection with STRT CHANNEL (Installer Menu item 004) where the Start Channel may, for
example, be set to 3 or 4. If the Start Channel is 3, then the TV
will remain locked on channel 3.
206-4177
011 - KEY DEFEAT (Keyboard Defeat)
If set to 1, KEY DEFEAT prevents the end user from accessing
the on-screen menus from the display panel—MENU, ENTER,
and menu navigation keys do not function. If set to 0, those keys
do function.
Note: Users can always access the menus by pressing MENU on
the remote.
17
Installer Menu (Cont.)
015 - SLEEP TIMER
If set to 1, the Sleep Timer feature may be used. If set to 0, the
Sleep Timer is not available.
016 - EN TIMER (Enable On/Off Timers) *
If set to 1, the Timer function is available to the end user and
enabled continuously. Set to 0 to disable On/Off timers.
Note: Clock must be set in order to use timers.
017 - ALARM *
Gives the installer the option of making the Alarm function available to the end user. If set to 1, the Alarm function is available to
the end user. Set to 0 to disable the Alarm function.
Note: Clock must be set before the Alarm function will work.
020 - FEATURE LEVEL
Determines the IR code scheme to which the TV will respond,
allowing for the use of unique IR codes based on “bed number” in
a multi-TV single room installation. First determine the IR mode;
then select the bed number.
Note: Multi-code remotes are not available for the current release.
For additional information, contact your LG representative.
021 - V-CHIP (Parental Control) *
Set to 1 to activate V-Chip (Parental Control) and have it available
to the end user to filter and control or otherwise restrict programming content that can appear. Set to 0 to turn the V-Chip feature
Off (not available to user); no programming restrictions can be set.
022 - MAX BLK HRS (Maximum Block Hours) *
Sets hours from 0 to 99 for the maximum V-Chip (Parental Control)
block hours. Default setting is for 12 blocking hours.
023 - CAPTION LOCK
If set to 0, captions are OFF when the TV is turned ON. Set to 1 to
use the caption setting configured before the TV was turned OFF
when the TV is turned ON.
028 - CH. OVERIDE (Channel Override)
If set to 1, the user can select channels with either Channel Up/
Down or by direct keypad entry. If set to 0, only those channels
that are active in the TV’s memory can be selected.
029 - OLD OCV (On Command Video™)
Set to 1 for operation with systems from On Command Corporation.
030 - ACK MASK
MPI Communication Parameter. Leave at default setting unless
changed by PPV provider. When set to 1, changes MPI for some
OCV boxes.
031 - POLL RATE
MPI Communication Parameter. Selects Poll Rate for MPI. Leave
at default setting unless changed by Pay-Per-View provider. Step
size of 16 ms.
032 - TIMING PULSE
MPI Communication Parameter. Leave at default setting unless
changed by Pay-Per-View provider. Sets baud rate. Step size of
4.3 uS.
034 - CAMPORT EN. (Camera Port Enable)
Set to 1 to enable Video 2 input on display panel. If set to 0, Video
2 input on display panel is not functional.
035 - COMPPORT EN. (Computer Port Enable)
Enable/disable TV display panel HDMI 1 input jack. Set to 0 to
disable HDMI1. Set to 1 to enable HDMI1.
038 - YPrPb EN. (Rear Component Video Enable)
Set to 1 to enable display panel rear Component Video input jacks.
Set to 0 to disable display panel rear Component Video input jacks.
039 - REAR AUX EN. (Rear Aux Enable)
Set to 1 to enable display panel rear Aux (Video 1) input. Set to 0
to disable display panel rear Aux (Video 1) input.
040 - AUTO CAMPORT
Set to 1 to automatically switch to Camport when equipment is
connected to side Video input. Set to 0 to disable side Video automatic source selection. If set to 1, STRT AUX SRCE
cannot be set to 2.
046 - STRT AUX SRCE (Start Aux Source)
Sets the starting Aux source. When turned ON, the TV will tune to
starting Aux source if item 004 STRT CHANNEL is set to 0.
If item 040 AUTO CAMPORT is set to 0:
1 = Video 1
4 = RGB
255 = Last Aux
2 = Video 2
5 = HDMI 2
3 = HDMI 1
6 = Component
If item 040 AUTO CAMPORT is set to 1:
1 = Video 1
4 = RGB
6 = Component
3 = HDMI 1
5 = HDMI 2
047 - AUX STATUS
Set to 1 for MPI Aux source to be reported as a channel number
instead of channel 0. Set to 0 to disable Aux identification change.
Controls MPI status channel response for Aux inputs.
053 - DIS. CH-TIME (Disable Channel-Time)
Set to 1 to disable the Channel-Time display; Channel-Time display will not appear. Set to 0 to enable the Channel-Time display.
* Only affects Function Menu if enabled by some PPV providers.
18
206-4177
Installer Menu (Cont.)
069 - EN. CH-T COL. (Enable Channel-Time Custom Color)
Set to 1 to enable custom color for the Channel-Time display. Set
to 0 to disable custom color for the Channel-Time display.
070 - FOR. CH-TIME (Channel-Time Display Foreground Color)
Set according to Color Chart:
0 = Black
3 = Cyan
6 = Yellow
1 = Blue
4 = Red
7 = White
2 = Green
5 = Violet
Note: Applies only to “Channel Not Available” message if item
073 is set to 1 (enabled). If foreground color and background
color are the same, the menu background will be transparent.
071 - BCK. CH-TIME (Channel-Time Display Background Color)
Set according to Color Chart:
0 = Black
3 = Cyan
6 = Yellow
1 = Blue
4 = Red
7 = White
2 = Green
5 = Violet
Note: Applies only to “Channel Not Available” message if item
073 is set to 1 (enabled). If foreground color and background
color are the same, the menu background will be transparent.
073 - CH NOT AVBLE (Channel Not Available)
If set to 1 and item 028 CH. OVERIDE is set to 0, a “NOT AVAILABLE” message is displayed when directly accessing a channel
not in the channel scan list available in memory.
075 - REVERT CH (Revert to Start Channel)
If set to 1 and loss of MPI communication occurs, TV automatically tunes to the specified Start Channel.
083 - HANDSHK TIME (Handshake Time)
Adds an additional delay to the handshake time which is 64 msec,
thus relaxing MPI timing requirements to be compatible with PCbased Windows controlled systems. Range is 0 - 5.
(Timeout = 25.5MS + [25.5 MS* Handshake time].)
084 - PERMANENT BLK (Permanent Block)
Allows Lock (Parental Control) blocking schemes to be permanent
by disabling the blocking hours function. Set to 1 to install Parental Control restrictions permanently. Set to 0 for user-specified
hours control of blocking schemes.
087 - REAR RGB EN. (Rear RGB Enable)
Controls access to rear RGB input on TV. Set to 0 to disable RGB
input. Set to 1 to enable for PC RGB input. Set to 17 to initiate a
one-time automatic configuration after an AC power cycle; otherwise, automatic adjustment will be performed each time the RGB
input is accessed.
088 - EN NOISE MUTE (Enable Noise Mute)
If set to 1, audio mutes if no signal is present.
090 - KEY LOCK
If set to 1, front keyboard Channel, Volume, and Captions buttons
are disabled, Power button remains enabled. If set to 0, the Channel, Volume, Captions, and Power buttons are all enabled.
091 - YPrPb2 EN. (HDMI2 Enable)
Set to 0 to disable display panel HDMI2 input. Set to 1 to enable
DTV mode. Set to 2 to enable PC mode.
078 - UPN MSB (UPN Most Significant Byte)
User programmable number, most significant byte readable by
MPI command. Not linked to serial number.
094 - SAP MENU EN (2nd Audio Program)
Set to 1 to enable SAP feature on Function Menu, if Function
Menu is available. Set to 0 to disable SAP feature on Function
Menu, if Function Menu is available.
079 - UPN MSB-1 (UPN Most Significant Byte-1)
User programmable number, most significant byte-1 readable by
MPI command. Not linked to serial number.
096 - DEF. ASP. RATIO (Default Aspect Ratio)
Selects default aspect ratio at power up.
080 - UPN MSB-2 (UPN Most Significant Byte-2)
User programmable number, most significant byte-2 readable by
MPI command. Note: Not linked to serial number.
081 - UPN LSB (UPN Least Significant Byte)
User programmable number, least significant byte readable by
MPI command. Note: Not linked to serial number.
082 - CHKSM ERROR (Checksum Error)
Enforces rigid MPI checksum validation. Set to 1 for validation.
Set to 0 to disable (does not check checksum on MPI async port).
SPI is always checked.
206-4177
•
•
•
•
•
Set to 0 for Set By System.
Set to 1 for 4:3.
Set to 2 for 16:9 (Factory Default).
Set to 3 for Just Scan.
Set to 4 for Zoom.
Note: Only applies if item 106 ASP RATIO LOCK is disabled, set
to 0.
098 - PRO:CENTRIC
Selects the Pro:Centric Mode. Set to 0 (default) to disable
Pro:Centric operation. Set to 1 for Flash Mode. Set to 2 for GEM
(Java Application) Mode.
19
Installer Menu (Cont.)
099 - BACK LIGHTING
Sets the TV screen brightness at power up. Default setting is 100.
• 1 - 100 Static Back Lighting
(1 = Dimmest picture, 100 = Brightest picture)
• 101 - 200 Dynamic Back Lighting
(101 = Dimmest picture, 200 = Brightest picture)
If set between 101 and 200, the TV automatically controls back
lighting depending upon the picture level of the current program. If
set to 255, back lighting is controlled via the Picture settings in the
TV’s setup menus.
102 - ATSC BAND
Sets up TV to receive different types of incoming signals:
0 = Broadcast, 1 = CATV, 2 = HRC, 3 = IRC, 4 = Same as NTSC.
103 - ATSC TUNE MODE
Sets ATSC tuning mode: Default set to 1 for Physical Channel
scan. Set to 0 for Virtual Channel scan.
104 - START MINOR CHANNEL
Sets Minor Start Channel number at power up. 0 = NTSC. If not
0, number selected is the digital channel’s Minor Start Channel
number.
116 - VIDEO MUTE EN (Video Mute Enable)
Set to 0 for Normal. Set to 1 for Blank.
117 - FACT DEFAULT (Factory Default)
Set to 0 for normal. Set to 1 to load presets of all Installer Menu
item settings.
Warning: If set to 1, this will reload the factory defaults and clear the channel lineup, including any
assigned channel icons and custom channel labels.
119 - DATA CHANNEL
Set to 0 (default) to disable. Set to the RF channel number of the
Data Channel for Pro:Centric or E-Z Installation (splash screen,
configuration, or firmware) data.
Note: Pro:Centric updates are downloaded from the Pro:Centric
server to the TV when the TV is turned OFF. Also, while
Pro:Centric updates are in progress, it is not possible to turn the
TV ON. The TV may take several minutes to load EPG data after
the initial download of the Pro:Centric application. Subsequent
updates generally will take less than one minute.
106 - ASP RATIO LOCK (Aspect Ratio Lock)
Set to 1 to retain previous aspect ratio with power off. Set to 0 to
retain default aspect ratio with power off. See item 096 DEF. ASP.
RATIO above.
20
206-4177
TV Setup Menus Overview
On-screen setup menus control the features of the TV. Press MENU on the Installer Remote to access
the TV setup menus, and set the TV features to the desired configuration for the end user.
CHANNEL
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
OPTION
INPUT
MY MEDIA
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for further information on the TV setup menus.
206-4177
21
Adding Channel Label Icons / Custom Channel Labels
(2-5-4 + MENU Mode)
Editing/Adding Channel Icons and/or Labels
If there is no pre-assigned icon, you can make a custom
channel label of up to seven (7) characters to help identify
a channel or network. If desired, channel labels can also
be added in addition to a pre-assigned icon. You may also
add labels for the Aux input sources to clearly identify the
devices that are connected to the Aux inputs.
(Icon)
XYZ
XYZ
XYZ
NETWORK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(Label)
Editing and adding the labels can only be done if there are
channels entered into the TV’s Channel Map either during
Commercial Mode Setup (see pages 12 to 13), by cloning,
or by using some PPV providers’ master remote controls.
Note: A blank letter space is available between “Z” and “!”.
To perform channel editing/labeling:
1. Enter the TV Installer Menu: Press MENU repeatedly
until the on-screen setup menus lock up, and then
press 9-8-7-6 + ENTER.
2. Press 2-5-4 + MENU on the Installer Remote to enter
the Channel Label Editing Mode.
3. Add channel icons and channel labels as described in
the procedures below. (You can do this more than once.)
4. To exit the menu when you are done, press MENU.
Changing a Channel’s Icon on
the Master TV
Changing/Adding Channel
Labels on the Master TV
Changing Source Labels on the
Master TV
1. Use Channel Up/Down to select
the desired channel.
1. Use Channel Up/Down to select
the desired channel.
2. Use the Left/Right arrow keys
to select the thin letter “I” on the
Channel ID display.
2. Press the Left or Right arrow
repeatedly until the numbers 1 to 7
appear on the display. The number
shows the position of the character
that can be changed. Number 1 is
the first character, number 2 the
second character, etc.
1. Press INPUT to select the desired
Aux input source: A/V 1, A/V 2,
HDMI Component, RGB, etc.
3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
select the icon with which you want
to identify the channel. (If you know
the icon number, enter the number,
and press ENTER.)
4. Proceed to change/add channel
labels, or go to the next channel.
3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
select the desired character.
4. Proceed to the next number position, or use Channel Up/Down to
go to the next channel.
2. Press the Left or Right arrow
repeatedly until the numbers 0 to 9
appear on the display. The number
shows the position of the character
that can be changed.
3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
select the desired character.
4. Press INPUT for the next Aux
source, or use Channel Up/Down
to return to channels.
Installer Remote Control Key Functions for Master TV Channel Editing/Labeling Menu
• Channel Up/Down: Tunes to the next channel in scan.
• Left/Right Arrows: Select the item to change. If “I” is
shown, the icon can be changed. If a number is shown, it
indicates the position of the character that can be changed.
• Up/Down Arrows: Select the icon or the character to be
displayed. Tip: Arrows can be held down for fast scrolling.
22
• 0 – 9: Use to enter the index number of the icon, if
known.
• ENTER: Changes the icon after the number has been
entered.
• INPUT: Changes the Aux input label.
• MENU: Exits the editing process.
206-4177
Cloning Overview / Clonable Menu Features
IMPORTANT CLONING INFORMATION
There are three options for cloning a Master
TV Setup:
• Using a USB memory device
• Using a TLL-1100A clone programmer
• Using a LT2002 clone programmer
Each option is described in further detail on
the pages that follow. As you perform cloning
procedures, be sure to complete each task as
indicated. If a procedure or step is omitted or
not performed completely, cloning may not
work. At each step, pay attention to ensure the
TV screen shows the proper message when
cloning. If the message indicated does not
appear, there is a problem with that step, and
cloning may not be successful.
Warning: Copying a blank or
incorrect memory into a TV will
cause the TV to operate erratically
or become inoperable.
Warning: Do not connect a clone
programmer to a PPV card installed
in the Master or Target TVs, as this
will damage the clone programmer
and the PPV card.
Before you begin cloning:
• Complete the Commercial Mode Setup for Master TV procedure on
pages 12 to 13.
• Ensure Installer Menu items on Target TVs are set/restored to factory
default settings (i.e., set Installer Menu item 117 FACT DEFAULT to
001 on Target TVs) before Teaching is initiated.
• All equipment should be connected to power and turned ON.
• Learning and Teaching is only possible between identical model TVs.
• The Master and Target TVs must be in Pass-through Mode.
• If using a USB memory device, ensure the USB device has been
formatted with FAT format.
• For both Master and Target TVs—If using a clone programmer,
ensure the TV signal source is either an Aux or TV (RF) source. If
a TV (RF) source, the TV must be tuned to an analog (not a digital)
channel.
• LT2002 only—Make sure the batteries in the clone programmer are
fresh. If batteries are removed, the clone programmer clock time (if
set) will be lost (see page 28 for information on the clone programmer clock).
• Do not unplug the TV power cord or remove/disconnect the USB
memory device/clone programmer while Learning or Teaching, as
doing so may cause the TV to malfunction or harm the USB device/
clone programmer, respectively.
Clonable Menu Features
Installer Menu
Installer Menu item settings
Channel
Auto Tuning (Channel Lineup)
Manual Tuning
Channel Edit
Channel Label
Picture
Aspect Ratio
Picture Mode
Advanced Control
Audio
Auto Volume
Clear Voice
Sound Mode
Balance
TV Speaker
Option
Menu Language
Audio Language
Caption
Caption Mode
Digital Caption Options
Lock
Movie Rating
TV Rating – Children
TV Rating – General
Input Block
Time
Auto Clock
Manual Clock
Off Time
On Time
Auto Off (Sleep Timer)
Note: Some menu options vary between analog and digital channels and Aux sources.
206-4177
23
Cloning Procedures
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using a USB Memory Device
USB Cloning Notes
• Read the IMPORTANT CLONING INFORMATION on page 23 before beginning any cloning procedures.
• You may edit a filename as part of the Learning procedure; however, a file with edited contents will not be
recognized.
• It is not possible to clone a Master TV’s clock using a USB memory device. Either set a Target TV’s clock
manually, or use the Auto Clock setting in the TV setup menus.
Learn Setup from Master TV
USB Download Menu
1. Ensure the Master TV is set up completely and in Pass-through Mode.
2. Plug the USB memory device into the USB IN port on the Master TV.
3. Press MENU on the Installer Remote to display the TV setup menus, use the
arrow navigation keys to select/highlight the Option menu icon, and then press the
number “7” key a total of seven times to display the USB Download Menu.
Upgrade TV Software
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV (TLL)
Teach To TV (FMA)
Learn From TV (TLL)
Learn From TV (FMA)
4. To gain access to the Learn From TV option in the USB Download Menu, key in
the password used to enter the Installer Menu (Example: Press 9-8-7-6).
Enter
Learn From TV (TLL)
Select the file name and press OK to start
►
5. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Learn From TV (TLL), and then press
ENTER.
Return
xxLD310H-UA00001.TLL
►
6. To identify the profile from others, you can use the Up/Down arrow keys to
change the last five digits of the filename. Press ENTER when you are ready to
initiate Learning.
Learning status will be shown on the progress bar. When the Learning
process is complete, the USB Download menu will reappear on screen.
Return
!
Learn From TV
UPDATING...
7. Remove the USB memory device.
Teach Master TV Setup to Target TV
Enter
25%
Do not remove the USB from the port!
Do not unplug!
1. Ensure the Target TV is in Pass-through Mode, and then use the Installer Remote
to enter the Target TV Installer Menu: Press MENU repeatedly until the on-screen
setup menus lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 + ENTER.
2. Set Installer Menu item 117 FACT DEFAULT to 001, and press ENTER. When the
value changes back to 0, press ENTER again to exit the Installer Menu.
3. Plug the USB memory device with the Master TV Setup file into the Target TV USB
IN port.
4. Press MENU on the Installer Remote to display the TV setup menus, use the
arrow navigation keys to select/highlight the Option menu icon, and then press the
number “7” key a total of seven times to display the USB Download Menu.
USB Download Menu
Upgrade TV Software
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV (TLL)
Teach To TV (FMA)
Return
Teach To TV (TLL)
5. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Teach To TV (TLL), and then press ENTER.
6. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select the Master TV Setup you want to install,
and then press ENTER. Note: Filenames identify the TV and the TLL version (see
example at right).
Teaching status will be shown on the progress bar. When the Teaching process is
complete, the USB Download menu will reappear on screen.
7. When Teaching is done, remove the USB memory device, turn OFF the TV, and
unplug the TV power cord for 15 seconds.
8. Reconnect the TV power cord, and turn ON the TV. The Master TV Setup should
be resident on the Target TV.
24
Enter
xxLD310H-UA00001.TLL
Return
!
Enter
Teach To TV
UPDATING...
50%
Do not remove the USB from the port!
Do not unplug!
206-4177
Cloning Procedures (Cont.)
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using a TLL-1100A Clone Programmer
Cloning is accomplished using the TV/
clone programmer MPI ports for communication (see figure).
TLL-1100A Cloning Notes
• Read the IMPORTANT CLONING
INFORMATION on page 23 before
beginning any cloning procedures.
• Ensure the TLL-1100A is either fully
charged or connected to AC power.
• Learning and Teaching is only
possible between identical model
TVs; however, the TLL-1100A clone
programmer can store up to eight
different Master TV Setups.
TLL-1100A Clone
Programmer
CHARGE
Warning: Do not connect a clone programmer to a PPV card installed in the Master or Target
TVs, as this will damage the clone programmer and the PPV card.
TV Link
Loader
TLL1100A
Ready
Antenna
or CATV
MODE
CLONE SELECTION MENU
Selected Bank: CBankX Saved
(1) LEARN FROM TV
(2) TEACH TO TV
(3) SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
(4) SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
(5) DISPLAY TV SETUP
(6) DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
MPI
Cable
MENU
ENTER
SEND
RECEIVE
TLL-1100A
Learn Setup from Master TV
1. Ensure the Master TV is set up completely and in Pass-through Mode.
2. If an analog channel is not available, direct tune the TV to an Aux source,
or select an Aux source, such as AV-1, from the Input Menu. Then, plug one
end of the MPI cable into the TV MPI port.
3. Turn ON the TLL-1100A.
4. Use the MODE button on the TLL-1100A to select Clone Mode.
5. Use the Left/Right arrows on the TLL-1100A to select the Memory CBank
(1 to 8) in which to store the Master TV Setup.
6. Plug the other end of the MPI cable into the MPI port on the bottom of the
TLL-1100A. The Clone Selection Menu will display on the TV screen.
7. Press 1 on the Installer Remote to select LEARN FROM TV from the Clone
Selection Menu. Then, press ENTER to transfer the Master TV Setup into
CBankX on the TLL-1100A.
Learning usually takes about 90 seconds. “LEARNING IN PROGRESS” will
be displayed on the screen while the TLL-1100A copies the Master Setup.
When the Learning process is complete, a “LEARNING COMPLETE” message will be displayed.
206-4177
CLONE SELECTION MENU
Selected Bank: CBankX Saved
(1) LEARN FROM TV
(2) TEACH TO TV
(3) SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
(4) SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
(5) DISPLAY TV SETUP
(6) DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
THE CLONE IS VERSION VX.X.X
- To change menu items, press
channel keys or digits.
- To execute item, press Enter.
25
Cloning Procedures (Cont.)
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using a TLL-1100A Clone Programmer (Cont.)
(Optional) Set the Clock
Set the time on a Master TV’s clock. (If the time has already been copied
from a TV into the TLL-1100A clone programmer, you can set the Master TV’s
clock by copying the time from the clone programmer.) The TLL-1100A can
copy the current time to both a Master TV and to the clone’s internal clock—
accurate to within one minute.
Since the TLL-1100A’s time cannot be set directly, the current time needs to
be copied from an LG TV equipped with an enabled MPI port.
After the time is copied to the TLL-1100A clone programmer, the current time
will be maintained and can then be transferred to another TV. (This can be a
Master TV or another TV which has already had the features set up.)
Teach Master TV Setup to Target TV
CLONE SELECTION MENU
Selected Bank: CBankX Saved
(1) LEARN FROM TV
(2) TEACH TO TV
(3) SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
(4) SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
(5) DISPLAY TV SETUP
(6) DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
THE CLONE IS VERSION VX.X.X
- To change menu items, press
channel keys or digits.
- To execute item, press Enter.
1. When Learning is complete, disconnect the MPI cable from the Master TV.
2. Ensure the Target TV is in Pass-through Mode, and then use the Installer
Remote to enter the Target TV Installer Menu: Press MENU repeatedly until
the on-screen setup menus lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 +
ENTER.
3. Set Installer Menu item 117 FACT DEFAULT to 001, and press ENTER.
When the value changes back to 0, press ENTER again to exit the
Installer Menu.
4. Tune/set the TV to an analog channel or Aux source, and then connect the
MPI cable to the MPI port on the Target TV. The Clone Selection Menu will
display on the TV screen.
5. Ensure the correct Memory CBank(X) is selected on the TLL-1100A.
6. Press 2 on the Installer Remote to select TEACH TO TV from the Clone
Selection Menu. Then, press ENTER to transfer the Master TV Setup to
the Target TV.
Teaching usually takes 3 to 4 minutes. “TEACHING IN PROGRESS” will
be displayed on the screen during Teaching. When the Teaching process is
complete, a “TEACHING COMPLETE” message will be displayed.
7. When Teaching is done, disconnect the MPI cable from the Target TV, turn
OFF the TV, and unplug the TV power cord for 15 seconds.
8. Reconnect the TV power cord, and turn ON the TV. The Master TV Setup
should be resident on the Target TV.
26
CLONE SELECTION MENU
Selected Bank: CBankX Saved
(1) LEARN FROM TV
(2) TEACH TO TV
(3) SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
(4) SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
(5) DISPLAY TV SETUP
(6) DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
THE CLONE IS VERSION VX.X.X
- To change menu items, press
channel keys or digits.
- To execute item, press Enter.
206-4177
Cloning Procedures (Cont.)
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using an LT2002 Clone Programmer
Warning: Do not connect a clone programmer to a PPV card installed in the Master or Target
TVs, as this will damage the clone programmer and the PPV card.
Cloning is accomplished using the TV/clone programmer MPI ports for communication (see figure).
LT2002 Cloning Notes
• Read the IMPORTANT CLONING
INFORMATION on page 23 before
beginning any cloning procedures.
• A slow flashing green light indicates
that there are communication
problems between the TV and the
LT2002 clone programmer. If this is
the case, check for a damaged
cable, poor contacts, or other
connection troubles.
• If the status indicator is red, the
LT2002 batteries are low and
should be replaced. Install four (4)
high-quality alkaline AA batteries.
• Learning and Teaching is only
possible between identical model
TVs; however, the LT2002 clone
programmer can store up to three
different Master TV Setups.
MPI
Cable
Antenna
or CATV
Ferrite Core
(TDK, ZCAT
2035-0930)
$POOFDUDBCMFUP
57.1*+BDLBOE
GPMMPXPOTDSFFO
instructions
$PMPS
tHSFFO CBUUFSZPL
tSFE
CBUUFSZMPX
Reset
#MJOLQBUUFSO
tTMPX QPXFSPO
no communications
tIFBSUCFBUQPXFSPO
communications ok
THE CLONE HAS CONTROL OF THE TV
THE CLONE IS VERSION XX
THE TV IS VERSION XX
THE SW IS REViSION XX
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
®
QuickSet II Programmer
LT2002
- PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
LT2002 Clone
Programmer
Learn Setup from Master TV
ZENITH ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, LINCOLNSHIRE, ILLINOIS, USA
THE CLONE HAS CONTROL OF THE TV
1. Ensure the Master TV is set up completely and in Pass-through Mode.
2. If an analog channel is not available, direct tune the TV to an Aux source,
or select an Aux source, such as AV-1, from the Input Menu. Then, plug one
end of the MPI cable into the TV MPI port.
3. If there is a good connection after the LT2002 is connected to the TV MPI
port, “THE CLONE HAS CONTROL OF THE TV” message will appear on
the TV screen. Press any key on the Installer Remote to access the LT2002
Clone Selection Menu.
4. Press 1 on the Installer Remote to select LEARN FROM TV from the Clone
Selection Menu; then press ENTER to proceed to the Memory Bank Selection Menu (see sample screen on next page).
5. Select the clone Memory Bank in which to store the Master Setup by pressing either Channel key repeatedly to choose Memory Bank 1, 2, or 3. Note:
If you choose a Memory Bank that already has a Master device’s setup programmed into it, that setup will be overwritten by the new Master TV Setup.
(Continued on next page)
206-4177
Status
*OEJDBUPS
MPI
THE CLONE IS VERSION XX
THE TV IS VERSION
XX
THE SW IS REVISION
XX
CLONE CLOCK = XX:XX
TV
CLOCK = XX:XX
- PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
- DISCONNECT CLONE WHEN DONE.
CLONE SELECTION MENU
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
LEARN FROM TV
TEACH TO TV
SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
DISPLAY TV SETUP
DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
27
Cloning Procedures (Cont.)
Learning / Teaching a Master TV Setup using an LT2002 Clone Programmer (Cont.)
(Continued from previous page)
6. Once you select the clone Memory Bank, press ENTER on the Installer
Remote. The Memory Bank you selected will be shown.
7. Press POWER to transfer the Master TV Setup into the selected Memory
Bank on the LT2002.
Learning usually takes about 90 seconds. “LEARNING IN PROGRESS” will
be displayed on the screen while the LT2002 copies the Master Setup. When
the Learning process is complete, a “LEARNING COMPLETE” message will
be displayed.
SAVE TV SETUP IN SELECTED
CLONE MEMORY
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
MEMORY 1 VER XX REV XX
MEMORY 2 VER XX REV XX
MEMORY 3 VER XX REV XX
RETURN TO CLONE MENU
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
(Optional) Set the Clock
Set the time on a Master TV’s clock. (If the time has already been copied from a
TV into the LT2002 clone programmer, you can set the Master TV’s clock by
copying the time from the clone programmer.) The LT2002 can copy the current
time to both a Master TV and to the clone’s internal clock—accurate to within
one minute. (Another reason that the LT2002 should be equipped with fresh,
high-quality alkaline batteries, is for it to keep the time as accurately as possible.)
CLONE SELECTION MENU
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
LEARN FROM TV
TEACH TO TV
SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
DISPLAY TV SETUP
DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
Since the LT2002’s time cannot be set directly, the current time needs to be
copied from an LG TV equipped with an enabled MPI port.
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
After the time is copied to the LT2002 clone programmer, the current time will be
maintained and can then be transferred to another TV. (This can be a Master TV
or another TV which has already had the features set up.)
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
Teach Master TV Setup to Target TV
1. When Learning is complete, disconnect the MPI cable from the Master TV.
2. Ensure the Target TV is in Pass-through Mode, and then use the Installer
Remote to enter the Target TV Installer Menu: Press MENU repeatedly until
the on-screen setup menus lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 + ENTER.
3. Set Installer Menu item 117 FACT DEFAULT to 001, and press ENTER. When
the value changes back to 0, press ENTER again to exit the Installer Menu.
4. Tune/set the TV to an analog channel or Aux source, and then connect the
MPI cable to the MPI port on the Target TV.
3. With “THE CLONE HAS CONTROL OF TV” message on display, press
2 on the Installer Remote to select TEACH TO TV from the LT2002 Clone
Selection Menu. Then, press ENTER.
4. Select the LT2002 Memory Bank in which the new setup is located. Then,
press POWER to transfer the Master TV Setup to the Target TV.
Teaching usually takes 3 to 4 minutes. “TEACHING IN PROGRESS” will
be displayed on the screen during Teaching. When the Teaching process is
complete, a “TEACHING COMPLETE” message will be displayed.
5. When Teaching is done, press any key on the Installer Remote to return to
the Clone Selection Menu. Then, press ENTER.
6. Disconnect the MPI cable from the Target TV, turn OFF the TV, and unplug
the TV power cord for 15 seconds.
CLONE SELECTION MENU
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
LEARN FROM TV
TEACH TO TV
SET CLONE CLOCK FROM TV
SET TV CLOCK FROM CLONE
DISPLAY TV SETUP
DISPLAY CLONE SETUP
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
COPY SELECTED CLONE MEMORY
TO TV
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
MEMORY 1 VER XX REV XX
MEMORY 2 VER XX REV XX
MEMORY 3 VER XX REV XX
RETURN TO CLONE MENU
- TO CHANGE MENU ITEMS, PRESS
CHANNEL KEYS OR DIGITS.
- TO EXECUTE ITEM, PRESS ON/OFF,
POWER, OR ENTER.
7. Reconnect the TV power cord, and turn ON the TV. The Master TV Setup
should be resident on the Target TV.
28
206-4177
FTG Mode of Operation
FTG Mode Overview / Determining the TV Operating Mode
FTG Mode Overview
FTG Mode enables Pro:Idiom decryption and also allows logical channel mapping of physical channels.
“Teaching” an FMA Configuration file to a LD310H TV puts the TV into FTG Mode. Once the LD310H TV is
in FTG Mode:
• Users can still access the Installer Menu; however, all Installer Menu items, with the exception of item
117 FACT DEFAULT will be read-only. To return the TV to Pass-through Mode, you must set Installer
Menu item 117 FACT DEFAULT to 001 to reload factory default settings on the TV. (See “Installer Menu”
section of this document for further information.)
• Any configuration updates must be made in the FTG Configuration Application. FTG Channel Map
Configuration and FTG Installer Menu Configuration Utilities enable you to update the FTG Channel Map
and FTG Installer Menu, as necessary, and the FMA Configuration Utility enables you to save the updates to a FMA Configuration file. The FMA Configuration file can then be transferred to the TV via a USB
memory device.
This section outlines how to create an FMA Configuration file using the FTG Channel Map, FTG
Installer Menu, and FMA Configuration Utilities that comprise the FTG Configuration Application. It also
describes how to transfer (Teach) an FMA Configuration file to a TV using a USB device. Refer to the
Free-To-Guest (FTG) Configuration Application manual for further information.
Note: The LD310H cannot be put into FTG Mode in this manner if an MPI slot card or external
MPI device has been implemented as a means of controlling the TV.
Determining the TV Operating Mode
To determine the operating mode of the
TV, press MENU on the Installer Remote.
If the end user Function Menu (showing
aspect ratio options) appears, the TV is
in FTG Mode. If the TV setup menus
appear, the TV is in Pass-through Mode.
ASPECT RATIO
Move
Enter
Function Menu
Shows that the TV is in FTG
Mode. While this menu is
present on-screen, Installer
Menu settings can ONLY be
changed using the FTG
Configuration Application to
update the FMA Configuration
file.
Set By Program
ABC
4:3
16:9
Zoom
Just Scan
206-4177
CHANNEL
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
OPTION
INPUT
MY MEDIA
TV Setup Menus
Shows that the TV is in
Pass-through Mode.
29
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
Creating an FMA Configuration File using the FTG Configuration Application
In order to enable Pro:Idiom decryption, it is recommended that you create an FMA Configuration file
using the FTG Configuration Application. However, if you do not know the RF channels at the site, you
can Learn an FMA Configuration file from a TV (see next page).
The procedure below provides an overview of the steps required to create an FMA Configuration (.fma)
file. Refer to the Free-To-Guest (FTG) Configuration Application manual for further information. See
also FTG Configuration Application sample screens on pages 33 to 36.
Note: FTG Configuration Application software is available online at: www.LGcommercial.com/FTGsoftware.
1. Install (if necessary) and launch the FTG Configuration Application (v5.0.0 or higher) on the PC that
will be used to create the FMA Configuration file.
2. Either:
• Open an existing FTG Configuration (.rml) file, if applicable, to use its FTG Channel Map. Otherwise,
create a new FTG Channel Map using the FTG Channel Map Editor in the FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility. Then, continue with step 3.
Note: Up to 141 logical channels can be defined in the FTG Channel Map.
• To view and/or base a new FMA Configuration file on an existing LD310H FMA Configuration file,
click Configure in the FTG Configuration Application menu bar, and select FMA to access the FMA
Configuration Utility. Then, click the Open button above the FMA Configuration List, and double-click
the desired (.fma) file. A list of the file’s contents will be displayed in the FMA Configuration List
window, and you can edit the FMA Configuration List as necessary to create a new file. Proceed to
step 4 when you are ready to continue.
3. Click Configure in the FTG Configuration Application menu bar, and select FMA to access the FMA
Configuration Utility.
4. To add an FTG Channel Map, click >> under FTG Channel Map to copy the current FTG Channel
Map to the FMA Configuration List.
Note: If you make any change(s) in the FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility to the current data to
be included in the FMA Configuration List, you will need to recopy the FTG Channel Map to the FMA
Configuration List.
5. Load default Installer Menu settings for the LD310H TV:
• Click the down arrow at the right of the Chassis field under Installer Menu Templates, and select
32/37LD310H from the drop-down list of available models.
• Click the Load button.
• Use the FTG Installer Menu Configuration Utility to modify settings, if necessary. Then, return to the
FMA Configuration Utility.
• Click >> under FTG Installer Menu Settings to copy the LD310H settings to the FMA Configuration
List.
6. Click the Save button above the FMA Configuration List to save its contents to an FMA Configuration
(.fma) file for later use.
7. Save the FMA Configuration file to a USB memory device, and proceed to “Teaching FMA
Configuration to a TV” on the following page to transfer the FMA Configuration file to an LD310H TV.
30
206-4177
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
Teaching FMA Configuration to a TV / Learning an FMA Configuration File from a TV
Teaching FMA Configuration to a TV
1. Plug the USB memory device that contains the FMA Configuration file into the Target
LD310H TV USB IN port.
2. Press MENU to display the TV setup menus, use the arrow navigation keys to select/
highlight either the Option (if TV is in Pass-through Mode) or Lock (if TV is already
in FTG Mode) menu icon, and then press the number “7” key a total of seven times to
display the USB Download Menu.
USB Download Menu
Upgrade TV Software
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV (TLL)
Teach To TV (FMA)
Return
Teach To TV (FMA)
3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Teach To TV (FMA), and then press ENTER.
4. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select the FMA Configuration file you want to install,
and then press ENTER.
The TV will show Teaching completion progress in a new window. Do NOT remove the
USB device until Teaching is complete. When Teaching is complete, the TV will tune to
the first logical channel in the FTG Channel Map.
5. When Teaching is done, remove the USB memory device. The FMA Configuration
should be resident on the Target TV. Also, the Target TV is now in FTG Mode (if it
was previously in Pass-through Mode).
Enter
xx0BAL-PLAT200001.FMA
Return
!
Enter
Teach To TV
UPDATING...
50%
Do not unplug!
Learning an FMA Configuration File from a TV
To ensure that Pro:Idiom decryption is enabled, it is recommended that you create an FMA Configuration file
using the FTG Configuration Application as described on the previous page. However, if necessary, this option
enables you to save (Learn) an FMA Configuration file from an LD310H TV to a USB memory device.
Note: If the LD310H TV is NOT already in FTG Mode, you may need to perform some
manual configuration on the TV before you start this procedure (see following page).
1. Plug a USB memory device into the USB IN port on the TV.
2. Press MENU to display the TV setup menus, use the arrow navigation keys to select/
highlight either the Option (if TV is in Pass-through Mode) or Lock (if TV is already
in FTG Mode) menu icon, and then press the number “7” key a total of seven times to
display the USB Download Menu.
USB Download Menu
Upgrade TV Software
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV (TLL)
Teach To TV (FMA)
Learn From TV (TLL)
Learn From TV (FMA)
Return
Enter
Learn From TV (FMA)
4. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Learn From TV (FMA), and then press ENTER.
Select the file name and press OK to start
►
3. To gain access to the Learn From TV options in the USB Download Menu, key in the
password used to enter the Installer Menu (Example: Press 9-8-7-6).
xx0BAL-PLAT200001.FMA
►
5. To identify the file from others, you can use the Up/Down arrow keys to change the
last five digits of the filename. Press ENTER when you are ready to initiate Learning.
The TV will show Learning completion progress in a new window. Do NOT remove the
USB device until Learning is complete. When Learning is complete, the USB Download
Menu will reappear on screen.
Return
!
Learn From TV
UPDATING...
6. When you are finished, remove the USB memory device.
Note: It is highly recommended that you open this FMA Configuration file in
the FTG Configuration Application—BEFORE transferring (Teaching) the file
to any TVs—to verify FTG Channel Map and FTG Installer Menu settings
and enable Pro:Idiom decryption by marking Encrypted channels. This will
also enable you to confirm and add channel attributes, labels, etc.
206-4177
Enter
25%
Do not unplug!
31
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
Optional Manual Configuration / Setup for a TV
The manual configuration procedures below should only be performed if you do not know the RF channels
at the site and need to Learn the FMA Configuration file from an LD310H TV.
Set Installer Menu Items
These steps provide specific instruction only on the Installer Menu items
that should be set on an LD310H TV. Refer to pages 14 to 20 for detailed
information on all Installer Menu items.
1. Make sure the TV is ON. Then, use the Installer Remote to enter the TV
Installer Menu: Press MENU repeatedly until the on-screen setup menus
lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 + ENTER.
2. Set Installer Menu item 117 FACT DEFAULT to 001 and press ENTER
on the Installer Remote.
This clears all Installer Menu custom settings, the channel lineup, etc.
and reloads the factory default settings. The value will change back to 0
after the internal TV controller (PTC) has been restored to factory default
condition. This step ensures that the TV Channel Memory will be the
active channel lineup.
3. Set Installer Menu item 003 BAND/AFC, as appropriate.
• Broadcast: Set to 000.
• HRC: Set to 002.
• CATV: Set to 001 (default).
• IRC: Set to 003.
4. Set any other Installer Menu items that affect your TV programming
network to the required configuration. For example, enable/disable Aux
sources, set a Start Channel, etc.
5. After you have adjusted all required Installer Menu item settings, press
ENTER once on the Installer Remote to save your changes; then, press
ENTER again to exit the menu.
Run Auto Tuning (Channel Search)
Note: In the FMA Configuration file, Logical Channel numbers will automatically be assigned in ascending order, starting with 0 (zero), to the Physical
Channels from the TV Channel Map.
xxLD310H PTC INSTALLER MENU
000 INSTALLER SEQ
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.001
000
ASIC 20E7
CPU V3.25.00
Typical TV Installer Menu
Note: The Installer Menu header will vary
depending on the TV you are setting up.
117
FACT DEFAULT
001
003
BAND/AFC
00X
Adjust the settings for these
Installer Menu items.
CHANNEL
Move
Enter
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Channel Edit
Channel Label
Note: Pro:Idiom decryption for encrypted channels will not be enabled unless
you use the FTG Configuration Application to set the channel attributes.
1. Search for all available analog and digital channels: Use the Installer
Remote to go to the Channel Menu, select the Auto Tuning option, and
follow the on-screen instructions.
Run Auto Tuning and edit the channel
lineup, as necessary.
2. Use the Channel Edit option in the Channel Menu to edit the channel
lineup, as necessary, to include free to guest channels only. Add/delete
channels per your system requirements. Note that physical channel numbers are used to identify virtual channels. Also, channel numbers cannot
be higher than 255.
32
206-4177
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility Overview
The FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility enables you to build a Channel Map with logical channel
numbers.
Note: Write, Read, and Learn functions in the FTG Channel Map Configuration Utility are used for local
FTG configuration of TVs that support a direct connection to a PC. These functions are not applicable to
the process of creating an FMA Configuration file to be used with LD310H TVs.
EDIT/ADD MAP
Click to open the FTG Channel
Map Editor to create or edit an
FTG Channel Map (see below).
PRINT MAP
Click to display a printable
FTG Channel Map Report. The
report can also be exported as
an HTML or Text file.
206-4177
33
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
FTG Channel Map Editor Overview
The FTG Channel Map Editor shows a single Logical Channel’s Data and the FTG Channel Map.
LOGICAL CHANNEL MAPPING
Select a Logical Channel number, then
assign it the RF, Major, and Minor channel numbers to complete the mapping.
CUSTOM CHANNEL LABELS/ICONS
Enter custom labels and select icons by
name on menu or by number.
DELETE
Click to remove highlighted
channel from FTG Channel
Map.
SET CHANNEL ATTRIBUTES
Check/select Encrypted, OSD,
or Blank Video.
EXIT
Click to exit editor and
return to FTG Channel
Map Configuration Utility.
ADD
After defining a new Logical
Channel, click to add channel
to the FTG Channel Map.
UPDATE
After editing an existing
Logical Channel’s data, click
to commit the changes in the
FTG Channel Map.
34
206-4177
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
FTG Installer Menu Configuration Utility Overview
Note: Write, Read, Learn, and IR Remote Access functions in the FTG Installer Menu Configuration
Utility are used for local FTG configuration of TVs that support a direct connection to a PC. These
functions are not applicable to the process of creating an FMA Configuration file to be used with LD310H
TVs.
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
Select tabs for categories of Installer
Menu items to set up TV.
HOSPITAL-GRADE TV ONLY
Set Hospital items on Installer Menu
for hospital-grade TVs.
INSTALLER DEFAULTS
Click to reset FTG Installer Menu
items shown in the FTG Configuration
Application to defaults.
206-4177
35
FTG Mode of Operation (Cont.)
FMA Configuration Utility Overview
Note: FMA Write, Read, Clock, Broadcast, Firmware, and IP Communication functions in the FMA
Configuration Utility are used to configure control equipment (Example: FMA-LG101) at the hotel/institution
head end. These functions are not applicable to the process of creating an FMA Configuration file to be
used with LD310H TVs.
Filename of opened
FTG Configuration
file (if applicable)
FMA CONFIGURATION LIST
(data to be saved or already
saved in FMA Configuration file)
NEW/OPEN/SAVE
FMA File options
Copy FTG Channel
Map to and from FMA
Configuration List.
Copy FTG Installer
Menu settings to
and from FMA
Configuration List.
Load default FTG
Installer Menu for
LD310H.
Note: The data referenced in the FMA Configuration List is only a snapshot of the current FTG Channel Map and FTG Installer Menu settings
when copied to the list. If you make any change(s) to the current data
to be included in the FMA Configuration List, you will need to recopy
Channel Map and Installer Menu settings to the FMA Configuration List.
36
206-4177
Reference: Upgrading TV/PTC Software using a USB Memory Device
Checking the Software Versions
xxLD310H PTC INSTALLER MENU
Note: This function is not accessible while the TV is
in FTG or PPV Mode.
You can check the software versions of the TV by
accessing the Installer Menu with the Installer
Remote: Press MENU repeatedly until the on-screen
setup menus lock up, and then press 9-8-7-6 +
ENTER. When you are finished, press ENTER again
to exit the Installer Menu.
000 INSTALLER SEQ
UPN 000-000-000-000
PTC V1.00.001
PTC Version
Upgrading TV/PTC Software
Before you begin, note that the software upgrade files must be stored in a folder
named “LG_DTV” in the root directory of the USB memory device. Also, ensure
the USB device has been formatted with FAT format.
Note for TV Software Upgrade only: If the TV detects a later version of software
on the USB device, it will automatically display a dialog from which you can start the
software upgrade immediately. Otherwise, you can close the dialog, and access the
USB Download Menu as described below.
1. Turn the TV ON.
Typical Installer
Menu
000
ASIC 20E7
CPU V3.25.00
CPU Version
USB Download Menu
Upgrade TV Software
Upgrade PTC Software
Teach To TV (TLL)
Teach To TV (FMA)
Return
Enter
TV Software Update (Expert)
2. Plug the USB memory device into the USB IN port on the TV.
3. Press MENU on the Installer Remote to display the TV setup menus.
4. Use the arrow navigation keys to select/highlight either the Option (if TV is in
Pass-through Mode) or Lock (if TV is in FTG or LodgeNet PPV Mode) menu
icon; then, press the number “7” key a total of seven times to display the USB
Download Menu.
The following update files are found in the USB device.
Select the file you want to apply to update this TV
or press EXIT to cancel the update.
TV Software Update
LOGO Image Download
5. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Upgrade TV Software or Upgrade
PTC Software, as applicable, and then press ENTER.
6. Select the appropriate option(s), depending on the type of upgrade you are
performing:
• TV Software Upgrade: (See screen samples at right.) Select TV Software
Update from the first TV Software Update window. In the second TV Software Update window, select the update file to install and press ENTER.
Note: Do not select Forced Update options unless you have been specifically
instructed to do so or have previous experience with Expert Software Updates.
• PTC Software Upgrade: In the PTC Software Update window, select the
update file to install and press ENTER.
Note: The PTC Software Update window is similar to the second TV Software Update window, though there are no Forced Update options. Current
software version information is shown at the top and update files on the USB
device are listed at the bottom of the window.
TV Software Update (Expert)
[ Current TV Software Version Information ]
EPK : 03.23.00
The following software files are found in the memory card.
Select the file you want to download to this TV
or press EXIT to cancel the update.
EPK : 03.25.00
[ Forced Update Option ]
Ext. MICOM
SPI Boot
LOGO Image
xxLD310H_v3_25_RevNo4697_USB
The TV will show update completion progress in a new window. Do NOT remove the USB device
until the software upgrade is complete. When a TV software upgrade is complete, the TV will reset
itself with an automatic restart. When a PTC upgrade is complete, the TV will turn OFF.
206-4177
37
Reference: Downloading a Splash Screen using a USB Memory Device
Splash Screen Image File Guidelines
USB Download Menu
• The splash screen image must be a baseline (not progressive) JPEG.
Upgrade TV Software
• The image should be no larger than 1 MB.
Upgrade PTC Software
• The ideal size for the image is 1366 x 768 pixels or under.
• The image file must be stored in a folder named “LG_DTV” in the root
directory of USB memory device.
• Ensure the USB device has been formatted with FAT format.
Teach To TV (TLL)
Teach To TV (FMA)
Return
Enter
TV Software Update (Expert)
Downloading a Splash Screen Image
1. Turn the TV ON.
2. Plug the USB memory device into the USB IN port on the TV.
The following update files are found in the USB device.
Select the file you want to apply to update this TV
or press EXIT to cancel the update.
3. Press MENU on the Installer Remote to display the TV setup menus.
4. Use the arrow navigation keys to select/highlight either the Option (if TV is
in Pass-through Mode) or Lock (if TV is in FTG or LodgeNet PPV Mode)
menu icon; then, press the number “7” key a total of seven times to display
the USB Download Menu.
5. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to select Upgrade TV Software, and then
press ENTER.
6. Select LOGO Image Download from the first TV Software Update window.
7. In the second TV Software Update window, select the image file to download and press ENTER.
The TV will show download completion progress in a new window. Do NOT
remove the USB device until the image download is complete. When the image
download is complete, the TV will reset itself with an automatic restart. Upon
the restart, you should see the new splash screen.
38
TV Software Update
LOGO Image Download
TV Software Update (Expert)
The following software files are found in the memory card.
Select the file you want to download to this TV
or press EXIT to cancel the update.
Splash Image 1366 X 768 ProCentric
206-4177
Reference: Power Consumption Settings
The following tables assume Installer Menu item 099 BACK LIGHTING is set as shown below
(default value is 100).
32LD310H
Item 099
Back Lighting
(Static)
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
37LD310H
Percent
Savings
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
Percent
Savings
100
72.97
0.00%
88.92
0.00%
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
1
63.82
58.53
53.58
44.24
41.27
38.71
36.20
33.51
31.01
28.55
12.54%
19.78%
26.57%
39.38%
43.45%
46.95%
50.39%
54.07%
57.51%
60.87%
84.19
77.84
72.19
66.28
60.90
56.58
52.35
47.75
43.68
39.62
5.32%
12.46%
18.81%
25.46%
31.51%
36.37%
41.13%
46.30%
50.88%
55.44%
32LD310H
Item 099
Back Lighting
(Dynamic)
37LD310H
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
Percent
Savings
Power
Consumption
(Watts)
200
75.45
0.00%
110.86
0.00%
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
101
69.23
65.26
60.72
56.29
51.82
46.62
41.67
36.14
31.11
26.41
8.25%
13.51%
19.53%
25.40%
31.33%
38.21%
44.78%
52.10%
58.76%
65.00%
99.05
92.33
85.39
78.61
71.70
63.53
55.65
47.34
39.90
33.00
10.65%
16.72%
22.98%
29.10%
35.32%
42.69%
49.80%
57.30%
64.01%
70.24%
Percent
Savings
Note: Values are results of controlled experiments under laboratory conditions.
206-4177
39
Reference: TV Camport Auto Sense Operation
The Camport Auto Sense function is enabled when:
1. Installer Menu item 034 CAMPORT EN is set to 1 AND
2. Installer Menu item 040 AUTO CAMPORT is enabled (1).
Selectable: Can be accessed with INPUT key, direct
access, etc.
Auto Sense: TV switches to this input when connector is
inserted. The Camport (Side [AV IN 2] Video) has the
highest priority and will override any commands including
tuning to the Start Channel.
Camport Operation (Stand-alone)
When Camport Auto Sense is enabled as above, the TV’s
source will switch to the Side (AV IN 2) Video Aux source
whenever a plug is inserted into the AV IN 2 Video input.
When the plug is removed, the TV will switch back to the
previous channel or input source that was being displayed
before the plug was inserted. However, if any direct access
to an RF channel or Aux channel is requested while the
Camport is active, then, when the video plug is removed,
the TV will switch to the last requested channel. Source
changes using any Source keys (INPUT) are ignored.
Channel Up/Down and Flashback commands are not direct
access tuning commands, and they are also ignored.
Camport Operation (FTG or PPV)
The operation will be similar to that of the Stand-alone
Mode. However, when the Channel Map is maintained
external to the PTC (i.e., FTG and PPV), Channel Up/
Down or Flashback keys are sent as Direct Access tuning
commands to the PTC/TV.
40
CAMPORT (Side Video) Functionality Control
Item 034
CAMPORT EN
Item 040
AUTO CAMPORT
Side (AV IN 2)
Video Operation
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Disabled
1
0
Selectable
1
1
Auto Sense
Previous State
Before Inserting
CAMPORT
Operation While
CAMPORT is
Active
State Upon
Removal of
CAMPORT
Aux or RF
Channel
None
Previous Aux
or RF Channel
Aux or RF
Channel
Direct Access
Last Requested
Aux or RF Channel
Aux or RF
Channel
Ch Up/Down,
Flashback, and
Input Keys
Previous Aux
or RF Channel
Previous State
Before Inserting
CAMPORT
Operation While
CAMPORT is
Active
State Upon
Removal of
CAMPORT
Aux or RF
Channel
None
Previous Aux
or RF Channel
Aux or RF
Channel
Direct Access
Last Requested
Aux or RF Channel
Aux or RF
Channel
Ch Up/Down,
Flashback, and
Input Keys
Last Requested Aux
or RF Channel
206-4177
Reference: TV Aux Input Configuration
ENABLE
DIRECT ACCESS
Tuning
TV
Installer Menu
MPI DATA
MPI DATA
STATUS TYPE
0x41 SOURCES
ENABLED (R/W)
DATA STATUS
TYPE 0xD2
CURRENT AV
SOURCE (R)
DATA STATUS
TYPE 0x0D
AUX
SOURCE (R)
START AUX
SOURCE
ASSIGNMENT
OLD_
OCV = 0
OLD_
OCV = 1
Source
Input
Source
Mode
Number
Labeling
Value
Labeling
Value
Labeling
130
90
Video2
(Side)
CV
34
CAMPORT_EN
0x01
Video Front
(Camport)
0
Video Front
(Camport)
0 (VIDEO)
2
131
91
Video1
(Rear)
CV
39
REAR_AUX_EN
0x02
Rear Video
(Aux)
1
Rear Video
(Aux)
0 (VIDEO)
1
132
92
HDMI2
DTV/PC
91
YPrPb2 EN = 1
0x04
S-Video Rear
2
S-Video Rear
0 (VIDEO)
5
133
93
HDMI1/DVI
DTV/PC
35
COMPPORT_EN
=1
0x08
Front
Computer
3
Front
Computer
0 (VIDEO)
3
134
94
RGB
PC
87
REAR RGB EN
=2
0x10
SVGA Rear
Computer
4
SVGA Rear
Computer
2
(COMPUTER)
4
136
96
Component
38
YPrPb EN
0x40
Y/UV
Component
6
Rear Y/PrPb
Component
Video
0 (VIDEO)
6
206-4177
41
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Some Quick and Easy Tips for Resolving Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
Channel not included in channel lineup in
TV controller.
After 2-5-5 + MENU, only channels included in TV controller
will appear. If channel is available, it can be added to channel lineup. If it is not available, the “No Signal” message
appears on the TV screen.
Software Problems
Cannot direct enter
channel number or “No
Signal” appears.
Power
No power.
See troubleshooting flow chart on following page.
Display Panel Picture
No picture.
Display panel is turned off.
• Turn TV ON.
• Power failure?
Antenna/cable not connected.
Connect antenna/cable signal to TV.
Connections incorrect.
Check connections on TV.
MPI not connected.
If applicable, connect MPI cable to MPI device.
Encrypted program.
Try another channel.
Wrong tuning band.
Adjust Installer Menu settings.
Wrong Installer Menu settings.
Adjust Installer Menu settings as required.
Remote not in TV Mode.
Use MODE key to select “TV”; puts remote into TV Mode.
Not aimed at IR remote sensor.
Point remote at TV’s IR receiver on TV.
Remote too far from IR sensor.
Move remote closer to TV’s IR receiver or darken room.
Erratic Operation
Installer Menu setup.
Installer Remote
Remote doesn’t work.
MPI not connected.
If applicable, connect MPI cable to MPI device.
IR path to TV’s receiver obstructed.
Remove obstructions.
Weak batteries.
Replace batteries.
Wrong battery polarity.
Check that “+” and “-” match in battery compartment.
Too much light in room.
Dim room light.
Wrong Installer Remote.
Requires compatible Installer Remote. Contact your LG
dealer.
Audio muted.
Press MUTE or use Volume Up key to increase sound level.
Broadcast problem.
Try a different channel.
Picture Reception
Normal picture,
poor or no sound.
Note: For other problems not caused by the TV, refer to the other devices’ operating guide(s).
42
206-4177
Troubleshooting (Cont.)
Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Controller
Quick Check
STATUS
LED on PTC
Board
blinking?
No
TV
connected
to AC
Power?
No
Plug into AC
Power outlet.
Yes
Yes
Bad
TV
Cycle the power by
removing and reconnecting
the AC Power cord. Then,
observe POWER LED
on front of TV.
POWER
LED lit?
No
Bad Analog or
Digital Board
TV
responded?
No
Bad
TV
No
Bad
PPV Card
Yes
Yes
Press POWER on
Installer Remote.
TV
turned ON?
Press VOLUME UP/
DOWN or MUTE key on
User-supplied Remote.
No
Bad
TV
TV
responded?
Yes
Yes
Press VOLUME UP/
DOWN or MUTE key
on Installer Remote.
206-4177
End
43
Troubleshooting (Cont.)
Commercial Mode Check / FTG Operation Troubleshooting
Commercial Mode Check
Press POWER on
Installer Remote.
TV
responded?
No
Bad
TV
Yes
Leave the TV set ON.
Go to Installer Menu
by pressing MENU until
the on-screen setup
menus lock up (i.e.,
stop responding).
TV
stopped
responding or
continued to
respond?
Stopped
responding
TV is in
Commercial Mode.
Continued
to respond
TV is not in Commercial
Mode. Call Technical
Support for assistance.
FTG Operation Troubleshooting
The following table provides troubleshooting information for when the TV is configured in the FTG Mode of operation.
Symptom
Possible Cause(s)
Solution(s)
Communication Error
(“Communications
Timeout”)
TV not powered.
Check/connect the TV power cord.
TV not turned ON.
TV needs to be turned ON (default FTG Mode).
44
206-4177
Troubleshooting (Cont.)
Clone Programmer Troubleshooting
Warning: Do not connect a clone programmer to a
PPV card installed in the Master or Target TVs, as this
will damage the clone programmer and the PPV card.
Reset Clone Programmer After Static Shock
After replacing exhausted batteries (LT2002 only), or if the clone
programmer behaves strangely after a static shock:
• TLL-1100A: Turn the TLL-1100A OFF and then ON.
• LT2002: Use a paper clip or similar instrument inserted through the
small hole marked RESET to activate the internal reset switch and
restore normal operation.
After a reset, check the real-time clock setting. It may be necessary
to set the clone programmer clock from a TV containing the correct
time.
Symptom
Notes
• The TLL-1100A and LT2002 clone programmers are
designed to be used with TVs containing the 22101006 and later processors. Use with earlier TVs may
give unpredictable results. Processors used before
the 221-01006-04 have a limited screen display capability; they cannot display entire screens as shown
in the setup instructions accompanying the clone
programmer. Use the printed menu illustrations in the
documentation as an aid to making your programming
choices.
• The Master and Target TVs must be in Pass-through
Mode for cloning purposes. See also IMPORTANT
CLONING INFORMATION on page 23.
Possible Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
Clone copies setup in less
than 30 seconds.
Not enough time to copy entire
TV setup.
TLL-1100A: Turn the TLL-1100A Off and then ON.
LT2002: Press RESET on clone programmer.
Then redo Learn/Teach. (Learning usually takes about 90 seconds;
Teaching usually takes 3 to 4 minutes.)
Remote does not operate
clone programmer.
Wrong Installer Remote.
Only use an LG Installer Remote to operate clone programmer
with TV.
Clone menu does not display on TV screen, TLL1100A shows error message, or LT2002 LED does
not blink.
MPI cord not connected.
Connect MPI cord properly, and ensure good connection.
TV not turned ON.
TV must be powered ON for clone programmer to work.
Clone Programmer
(LT2002 only) Weak batteries.
Install four (4) fresh AA high-quality alkaline batteries.
(TLL-1100A only) No charge.
Ensure the TLL-1100A is fully charged or connected to AC power.
Clone menu hard to read.
Weak signal.
Connect TV to a reliable analog channel signal source.
No time set.
Time not available.
Set time on a TV, and copy time to clone programmer.
Clone not working.
Clone programmer problem.
• Try a different clone programmer.
• Reset the clone programmer.
Clone scans channels
more than once.
Clone should only scan channels Ensure TV is set up correctly, and try cloning again.
once.
Master and Target TVs
Cloning did not work.
Procedure interrupted.
Wait until procedure complete message is displayed.
Different TV models.
Cloning is only possible with identical model TVs.
Step(s) omitted or not performed.
Refer to the applicable cloning procedure(s), and make sure all
tasks were performed.
(LT2002 only) Clone time
disappeared.
Batteries were removed.
Batteries must remain installed to retain time settings.
New setup not present.
Target TV not reset.
Disconnect Target TV from AC power for fifteen (15) seconds.
• After cloning operations are complete, unplug the TLL-1100A/LT2002 from the TV.
• If the TV does not display a picture (blank screen) after a few seconds, just change channels.
206-4177
45
Glossary of Terms
A list of definitions for some of the words found in this guide.
75 OHM RF CABLE
The wire that comes from an off-air
antenna or cable service provider. The
end looks like a hex-shaped nut with a
wire through the middle. It screws onto
the Antenna/Cable threaded jack on the
back of the TV.
300 TO 75 OHM ADAPTER
A small device that connects a 2-wire
300 ohm antenna to a 75 ohm RF jack.
It is usually about an inch long with two
screws on one end and a round opening
with a wire extending out the other end.
A/V CABLES
Audio/Video cables. Three cables
bunched together—right audio (red), left
audio (white), and video (yellow). A/V
cables are used for stereo playback of
videocassettes and for higher quality picture and sound from other A/V devices.
COMPOSITE VIDEO
Typical video jack, uses one wire for
transporting three-color video signals.
DELETE
Lets you remove channels from the list
that the end user can scroll through using Channel Up/Down.
DIGITAL TELEVISION
High-resolution, cinema-quality television
signals transmitted digitally.
DVI
Digital Video Interface. Accommodates
analog and digital interfaces with a
single connector.
HDMI
High-definition multi-media interface.
A/V DEVICE
Any device that produces video or sound
(VCR, DVD, cable box, or television).
HDSTB
High-definition set top box. Refers to a
tuner device that receives high-definition
television signals which have higher resolution than ordinary analog TV signals.
AMPLIFIER
An electronic device that amplifies sound
from a television, CD player, VCR, DVD
player, or other Audio/Video device.
HDTV
High-definition television. Refers to television signals that have higher resolution than ordinary analog TV signals.
ANTENNA
The physical receiver of television signals sent over the air. A large metal piece
of equipment does not always have to be
visible to be using an antenna.
INPUT
Refers to the input jack that receives a
signal from a TV, VCR, DVD Player or
other Audio/Video device.
CABLE
Cable service box. Refers to the descrambler box cable subscribers use to
receive cable programming signals.
JACK
An input or output connector on the
back of a TV, VCR, DVD Player or other
Audio/Video device.
CATV
Programming provided by a cable
service.
MONO SOUND
Mono (monaural) sound is one channel
of sound. On more than one speaker, all
the speakers play the same audio.
COMPONENT VIDEO
Uses three wires for transporting threecolor video signals. The end result is
usually better video quality.
OUTPUT
Refers to the output jack that sends a
signal out of a VCR, DVD, or other A/V
device.
46
PHYSICAL CHANNEL NUMBER
The actual channel number. Analog
channels use the Physical Channel
number and digital channels can use a
Virtual Channel number.
RGB (RED, GREEN, BLUE)
Connection input or output port available for producing a video image using
three separate colors: Red, Green, and
Blue.
RS-232
Serial communication port through
which firmware is downloaded.
2ND AUDIO PROGRAMMING/SAP
Second Audio Programming (SAP) is
another, separate audio channel available with some programming. Choosing
SAP often refers to listening to audio in
another language, such as Spanish or
French.
SIGNAL
Picture and sound traveling through a
cable, or over the air, to the TV.
STEREO SOUND
Stereo (Stereophonic) sound refers to
audio that’s divided into right and left
sides.
TUNER
Device that picks up the broadcast signal and turns it into picture and sound.
VIRTUAL CHANNEL NUMBER
A re-mapped channel number. Analog
channels use the Physical Channel
number; however digital channels use a
Virtual (or false) Channel number.
XDS
Extended Data Service. Additional
program information included on the
signal provided at the discretion of the
broadcaster.
Note: Refer to www.atsc.org for further
information.
206-4177
Document Revision History / Notes
Document Revision History
Date
Description
January 2011
Revision A: New Document
Product documentation is available online at: www.LGsolutions.com/products. From the Products page,
select TVs, Systems & Solutions, then LCD TVs, then the applicable TV. Click the Literature & Downloads
tab at the bottom of the TV page, and select the required document(s) from the Downloads list.
Notes
206-4177
47
For Customer Support/Service, please call:
1-888-865-3026
www.LGsolutions.com
Pro:Idiom is a registered trademark of Zenith Electronics LLC. Pro:Centric is a trademark of LG Electronics
U.S.A., Inc. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© Copyright 2011, LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
206-4177
Revision A